Home

Nortel Networks 24T User's Manual

1. Before After 10BASE T hubs i BayStack 410 24T switch Spo os Server k Up to 22 Server oe Ege ip SERS users Up to 23 00 Tee Foda eN users cy Up to 23 oo 00 kodad SL users sess fee T G o Up to 23 To eee users Up to To Network 88 users Network Center Center Up to 23 Key 90 oo M users o vos Ho 100 Mb s 25 200 Mb s Four sets of 23 users each set shares 10 Mb s 10 23 Mb s per user 88 users share 10 Mb s 10 88 Mb s per user Addition of 22 users each with dedicated Server bottleneck 10 Mb s bandwidth 10 Mb s bandwidth Network center bottleneck 10 Mb s bandwidth Server with dedicated 100 Mb s full duplex bandwidth Total of 88 users 200 Mb s bidirectional Network center with dedicated 100 Mb s full duplex bandwidth 200 Mb s bidirectional Total of 114 users BS41006A Figure 1 7 BayStack 410 24T Switch Used as a workgroup Switch 1 24 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch High Density Switched Workgroup Application Figure 1 8 shows a BayStack 410 24T switch using an optional 400 4TX MDA to connect to a BayStack 450 switc
2. eum DRPTYYS Unit 1 400 4FX MDA JEEP 2822 AA ASR A REA Unit 2 Unit 3 400 4FX MDA Unit 4 Uiessessisssess a Unit 5 400 4FX MDA P ace sss 3 Unit 6 Ge cE oo n Ti 400 4FX MDA tonn sti d BayStack 450 24T Switch D Unta ca ca 400 4FX MDA En mmm mm CJ E o 1 a BS41061A Figure 1 46 Loss of Distributed Trunk Members However until you correct the cause of the failure or change the trunk Status field to Disabled you will be unable to modify any of the following parameters for the affected trunk e VLAN Configuration e Spanning Tree Configuration e Port Mirroring Configuration e Port Configuration e IGMP Configuration e Rate Limiting Configuration 309985 B Rev 00 1 75 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Spanning Tree Considerations for MultiLink Trunks Path T1 4 ER re c d 100 Mb s 7 Path Cost 100 Mb s Cost 10 Mb s Lih 10 Mb s The spanning tree Path Cost parameter is recalculated based on the aggregate bandwidth of the trunk For example Figure 1 47 shows a four port trunk
3. IO 0 i a a eR Legend d Secure locked area BS41077A Figure 1 5 BayStack 410 24T Switch Security Feature 309985 B Rev 00 1 13 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch In this configuration example the following security measures are implemented The switch RADIUS based security is used to limit administrative access to the switch through user authentication see RADIUS Based Network Security on page 1 15 MAC address based security is used to allow up to 448 authorized stations MAC addresses access to one or more switch ports see MAC Address Based Security on page 1 15 The switch is located in a locked closet accessible only by authorized Technical Services personnel Student dormitory Dormitory rooms are typically occupied by two students and have been prewired with two RJ 45 jacks Only students who are authorized as specified by the MAC address based security feature can access the switch on the secured ports Teachers offices and classrooms The PCs that are located in the teachers offices and in the classrooms are assigned MAC address based security that is specific for each classroom and office location The security feature logically locks each wall ja
4. 8100 Priority VID 2 of VLAN 2 CRG F 16 bits 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits Data After Outgoing SA untagged packet p Key unchanged Priority User priority CFI Canonical format indicator SZ VID VLAN identifier BS41017A Figure 1 18 802 1Q Tagging After Port Based VLAN Assignment 309985 B Rev 00 1 39 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch In Figure 1 19 tagged incoming packets are assigned directly to VLAN 2 because of the tag assignment in the packet Port 5 is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2 and port 7 is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Tagged member PVID 2 gg Tagged packet m d of VLAN 2 CRC Data Tag SA DA gt 5 802 1Q Switch 5 i Port6 Port7 Ports Untagged member of VLAN 2 BS41018A Figure 1 19 802 1Q Tag Assignment As shown in Figure 1 20 the tagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through port 5 which is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2 However the tagged packet is stripped untagged as it leaves the switch through port 7 which is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2 PVID 2 Tagged member Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 yA of VLAN 2 T 802 1Q Switch 5 CRC Data
5. Host Membership Switch Host Report Membership Report BS41027A Figure 1 32 BayStack 410 24T Switch Filtering IP Multicast Streams 1 of 2 Switch S1 treats the consolidated proxy reports from S2 and S4 as if they were reports from any client connected to its ports and generates a consolidated proxy report to the designated router In this way the router receives a single consolidated report from that entire subnet 1 54 309985 B Rev 00 S1 Figure 1 33 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch After the switches learn which ports are requesting access to the IP Multicast stream all other ports not responding to the queries are blocked from receiving the IP Multicast see Figure 1 33 Internet Designated router Na Host Membership o LIE s p BayStack 410 24T re Switch BayStack 410 24T Switches BayStack 410 24T Switch Key Multicast stream ORE BayStack 410 24T Switch Filtering IP Multicast Streams 2 of 2 BS41028A The consolidated proxy report generated by the switch remains transparent to layer 3 of
6. sssseeeeeee 3 73 Table 3 29 Multicast Group Membership Screen Options sssss 3 77 Table 3 30 Port Statistics Screen Fields sei eet nenaset teni etr bett ek tib 3 79 Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields 3 82 Table 3 32 Renumber Stack Units Screen Options ssssssessuss 3 90 Table 3 33 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen Options 3 92 Table 3 34 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen Fields 3 94 Table 3 35 Spanning Tree Switch Settings Parameters ssssssss 3 97 Table 3 36 TELNET Configuration Screen Fields sss 3 100 Table 3 37 Software Download Screen Fields eese 3 103 Table 3 38 LED Indications During the Software Download Process 3 105 Table 3 39 Configuration File Download Upload Screen Fields 3 107 Table 3 40 Parameters Not Saved to the Configuration File 3 108 Table 4 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions seessssse 4 2 Table 4 2 agii fori d EE 4 5 Table 4 3 Software Download Error CodeS scere nee tete Erb npud edis i ER ea 4 8 Table B 1 400 4TX MDA Components 22 ccc cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeneees B 2
7. d Spanning Tree Port Configuration N Unit 1 Port Trunk Participation Priority Path Cost State 1 5 Normal Learning 128 5 Forwarding 16 Normal Learning 128 5 Forwarding 17 T ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 18 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 19 4 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 20 4 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 21 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 22 5 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 23 5 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 24 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 25 2 ormal Learning 128 10 Forwarding 26 2 ormal Learning 128 10 Forwarding 27 Normal Learning 128 10 Forwarding 28 Normal Learning 128 0 Forwarding Switch ormal Learning Stack ormal Learning Press Ctrl P to display choices for ports 1 14 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice ress Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menus y Figure 3 40 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen 2 of 2 Table 3 34 describes the Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen fields Table 3 34 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Unit This field only appears if the switch is participating in a stack configuration The field allows you to select the number of the unit you want to view To view another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar on your keyboard to toggle the unit numbers Port Indicates the switch port number
8. B Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main e Figure 1 45 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S4 309985 B Rev 00 1 71 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Switch S4 is configured as follows Trunk read only indicates the trunk 1 to 6 that corresponds to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields Trunk Members Unit Port indicates the ports that can be configured in each row to create the corresponding trunk Ports 5 and 11 are assigned as trunk members of trunk T1 STP Learning indicates the spanning tree participation setting for each of the trunks Trunk 1 is enabled for Normal STP Learning Trunk Mode read only indicates the Trunk Mode for each of the trunks The Trunk Mode field value for trunk 1 is set to Basic Source MAC addresses are statically assigned to specific trunk members for flooding and forwarding This allows the switch to stabilize and distribute the data streams of source addresses across the trunk members Trunk Status indicates the Trunk Status for each of the trunks When it is set to Enabled the configuration settings for that specific trunk are activated Trunk Name indicates optional fields for assigning names to the corresponding configured trunks The names chosen for this example provide meaningful information to the user for example S4 T5 to S1 indicates that Trunk 1 in switch S4 connects to Switch 1
9. Molly s port 3 0 Tagging Use space bar to display choices Untagged Access press Return or Enter to select choice bc Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main xr ES Figure 1 29 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Example VLAN Workgroup Summary This section summarizes the VLAN workgroup examples discussed in the previous sections of this chapter As shown in Figure 1 30 switch S1 a BayStack 410 24T switch is configured with multiple VLANs e Ports 1 6 11 and 12 are in VLAN 1 Ports 2 3 4 7 and 10 are in VLAN 2 e Port 8 is in VLAN 3 Because switch S4 does not support 802 1Q tagging a single switch port on each switch must be used for each VLAN see VLANs Spanning Multiple Untagged Switches on page 1 42 309985 B Rev 00 1 49 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch The connection to switch S2 requires only one link because both switch S1 and switch S2 BayStack 410 24T switches support 802 1Q tagging see VLANs Spanning Multiple 802 1Q Tagged Switches on page 1 41 Non 802 1Q tagging switch S4 f mm PE S2 cz pS l Both ports are tagged
10. 1 72 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Before Configuring Trunks When you create and enable a trunk the trunk members switch ports take on certain settings necessary for correct operation of the MultiLink Trunking feature These settings along with specific configuration rules must be considered before configuring your MultiLink Trunk Before configuring any MultiLink Trunk 1 Read the configuration rules provided in the next section MultiLink Trunking Configuration Rules 2 Determine which switch ports up to four are to become trunk members the specific ports making up the trunk a A minimum of two ports are required for each trunk b Ensure that the chosen switch ports are set to Enabled using the Port Configuration screen see Port Configuration on page 3 52 or through network management c Trunk member ports must have the same VLAN configuration 3 Allnetwork cabling should be complete and stable before configuring any trunks to avoid configuration errors 4 Consider how the existing spanning tree will react to the new trunk configuration see Spanning Tree Considerations for MultiLink Trunks on page 1 76 5 Consider how existing VLANS will be affected by the addition of a trunk 6 After completing the above steps see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 for screen examples and field descriptions that will help you configure your Mul
11. Untagged ports members of VLAN 1 STP disabled and VLAN 2 BayStack 410 24T S1 fees Non 802 1Q tagging switch S3 f mmm LHE VLAN 1 PVID 1 VLAN 2 PVID 2 TD VLAN 3 PVID 3 BS41025A Figure 1 30 VLAN Configuration Spanning Multiple Switches 1 50 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch VLAN Configuration Rules VLANs operate according to specific configuration rules When creating VLANs consider the following rules that determine how the configured VLAN reacts in any network topology e All ports that are involved in port mirroring must have memberships in the same VLANs If a port is configured for port mirroring the port s VLAN membership cannot be changed e Ifa port is a trunk group member all trunk members are added or deleted from the VLAN e All ports involved in trunking and port mirroring must have the same VLAN configuration If a port is on a trunk with a mirroring port the VLAN configuration cannot be changed e VLANs are not dependent on rate limiting settings e faportis an IGMP member on any VLAN and is removed from a VLAN the port s IGMP membership is also removed e When you add a port to a different VLAN and it is already configured as a static router port the port is configured as an IGMP member on that specific VLAN For more informatio
12. OY O1 4S Q0 ho P5 C Use space bar to display choices Veress Ctrl R to return to previous menu Traffic Cla Low Low Low Low LOW LOW ss Enter to select choice press Return or lt l UN Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 1 36 Default Traffic Class Configuration Screen Example 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch 5 Select a priority level from the range shown in the Traffic Class Configuration screen or modify the Traffic Class parameters to suit your needs 6 Assign the priority level to ports using the VLAN Port Configuration screen a Press Ctrl R to return to the VLAN Configuration Menu b From the VLAN Configuration Menu select VLAN Port Configuration or press c The VLAN Port Configuration screen opens Figure 1 37 Figure 1 37 shows the VLAN Port Configuration screen setup for port 4 in Figure 1 34 on page 1 57 VLAN Port Configuration Port 4 Filter Tagged Frames No Filter Untagged Frames No J Filter Unregistered Frames No Port Name Luke s port PVID 2 Port Priority 6 Tagging Untagged Access Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice al Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main ae Figure 1 37 Setting Port Priority Example For more information about using this feature s
13. Table 3 25 Monitoring Modes Fields Description Port based Disabled Default value for this feature Port X Monitor all traffic received by Port X Port X gt Monitor all traffic transmitted by Port X Port X Monitor all traffic received and transmitted by Port X gt PortX or Port Y gt gt Port X and Port Y gt lt gt Port X and Port Y lt gt Address based Disabled Address A gt any Address any Address gt Address A Address A Address A gt Address B Address A lt gt Address B Monitor all traffic received by Port X or transmitted by Port Y Monitor all traffic received by Port X destined to Port Y and then transmitted by Port Y Monitor all traffic received transmitted by Port X and received transmitted by Port Y Default value for this feature Monitor all traffic transmitted from Address A to any address Monitor all traffic received by Address A from any address Monitor all traffic received by or transmitted by Address A Monitor all traffic transmitted by Address A to Address B Monitor all traffic between Address A and Address B conversation between the two stations 309985 B Rev 00 3 67 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Rate Limiting Configuration The Rate Limiting Configuration screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets Figures 3 29 and 3 30 show sample rate limiting values for the two Rate
14. 309985 B Rev 00 3 21 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 6 MAC Address Table Screen Fields continued Field Description Find an Address Allows the user to search for a specific MAC address Default Value 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF Port Mirroring Address A Only appears when any of the five address based monitoring modes are selected from the Port Mirroring Configuration screen When you enter a MAC address in this field it is also configured into the Port Mirroring Configuration screen Conversely when you enter the MAC address from the Port Mirroring Configuration screen it also appears in this screen See Port Mirroring Configuration on page 3 64 for more information Default Value 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF Port Mirroring Address B Only appears when any of the two address based monitoring modes that use Address B are selected from the Port Mirroring Configuration screen When you enter a MAC address in this field it is also configured into the Port Mirroring Configuration screen Conversely when you enter the MAC address from the Port Mirroring Configuration screen it also appears in this screen See Port Mirroring Configuration on page 3 64 for more information Default Value 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF
15. Nortel Networks i Copyright c 1996 2000 All Rights Reserved BayStack 410 24T Versions HW Revx FW Vx xx SW vx x x x ISVN x Ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck Sk Ck ck ck ck kk ck ck kk ckck ck kk ko ck ck kk Sk Sk kv A ko ko ko Enter Ctrl Y to begin S P Figure 3 52 Nortel Networks Logo Screen After Resetting to Default Settings Note The Nortel Networks logo screen for your switch displays the BayStack 410 24T model number and the current hardware firmware and software versions Upon successful completion of the power up self tests the switch is ready for normal operation To access the BayStack 410 24T main menu press Ctrl Y 3 116 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Logout The Logout option accessed from the main menu allows a user working at a password protected console terminal or in an active TELNET session to terminate the session The Logout option works as follows e If you are accessing the BayStack 410 24T switch through a TELNET session the Logout option terminates the TELNET session e f you are accessing the BayStack 410 24T switch through a password protected console terminal connected to the console comm port on the switch the Logout option displays the console terminal password prompt Figure 3 53 If RADIUS authentication is enabled the password field is preceded by a username field You must enter the c
16. ht hardware type ha host hardware address tc template host points to similar host entry ip host IP address hd bootfile home directory bf bootfile EZ dt device typ EZ fv firmware version EZ av agent version with a pipe symbol Forward slashes are that an entry is continued to the next line 309985 B Rev 00 F 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Caution Omitting a Forward slash when the entry is continued to the next line can cause the interruption of the booting process or the incorrect image file to download Always include forward slashes where needed Important Note If a leading zero 0 is used in the IP address it is calculated as an octal number If the leading character is x upper or lower case it is calculated as a hexadecimal number For example if an IP address with a base 10 number of 45 is written as 045 in the BOOTPTAB TXT file the Bootp protocol assigns 037 to the client Global entries are defined that specify the parameters used by every devic Note that hardware type ht is specified first in the global entry The following global entry is defined for an Ethernet device Note that this is where a client s subnet mask sm and default gateway gw are defined globall ht ethernet hd c opt images 8m2255 255 255 0 gw 192 0 1 0 The following sampl ntry describes a BootP client bayl ht ethernet
17. 309985 B Rev 00 xxiii Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Before You Begin This guide is intended for network installers and system administrators who are responsible for installing configuring or maintaining networks This guide assumes that you understand the transmission and management protocols used on your network Organization This guide has four chapters six appendixes and an index If you want to Go to Learn about the BayStack 410 24T switch and its key features Chapter 1 Install the BayStack 410 24T switch on a flat surface or in a Chapter 2 19 inch equipment rack and verify its operation Connect to the BayStack 410 24T switch Console Comm Port and Chapter 3 learn how to use the console interface CI menus to configure and manage a standalone switch or a stack configuration Troubleshoot and diagnose problems with the BayStack 410 24T Chapter 4 switch View operational and environmental specifications that apply to Appendix A the BayStack 410 24T switch Learn about optional media dependent adapters MDAs you can Appendix B use with the BayStack 410 24T switch Learn about Quick Step flowcharts for using the BayStack Appendix C 410 24T switch features Learn more about the BayStack 410 24T switch connectors Appendix D ports and pin assignments View a listing of the factory default settings for the BayStack Appendix E 410 24T switch View a sample BootP configuration file Appendix F View a
18. Canada Requirements Only Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus BayStack 410 24T switch does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique du minist re des Communications Cet appareil num rique BayStack 410 24T switch respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques visant les appareils num riques de classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique du minist re des Communications du Canada 309985 B Rev 00 iii Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH NORTEL NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Nortel Networks NA Inc Nortel Networks grants the end user of the Soft
19. Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Nortel Networks 4401 Great America Parkway PO Box 58185 Santa Clara California 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN NORTEL NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST NORTEL NETWORKS UNLESS NORTEL NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT 309985 B Rev 00 V Contents Preface Pelose yon E CSI TIE E Oo o S DLE xxiv EEE iE A EA E E Po O pU CES O e ba C np ardt etd a dun xxiv TEC OVENS a aoa daas poin diebns aub dile nalla b m udin liebt XXV o n me E xxvi Felatert PHIIGOIIONS digne xp VER CUP DART UARETERKE wire ERR ERA UG PRA RET RE xxvii ni a Ger PED m EN xxviii Chapter 1 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch DOT DOT cima dorkk boriati aas pad cesar aston ae debo Sas gal ideal sod Free U UR UEF do Duda T N 1 1 lix eel 1 2 COMPOT st RU e AER aD Fe PE e Fa RR RR KOH e E e PRO 1 2 UTR SAS IO SIG senga ri anise Pei das Fino unt eX dta t iaa E Rc abad 1 3 TIUBASE T Port COIIBEIOIS ccasaccatedaincanaacdideadentgaadaainzedddadameidisc
20. Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice ipa Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main bd Figure 3 21 Port Configuration Screen 1 of 2 3 52 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface a Port Configuration UN Unit 1 Port Trunk Status Link LnkTrap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex 15 Enabled Down Off Disabled 10Mbs Full 16 Enabled Down Off Disabled 10Mbs Full IN 1 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Full 18 Enabled Down On Disabled 100Mbs Half 19 3 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Ful 20 3 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Full 21 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Half 22 4 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Ful 23 4 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Full 24 Enabled Down On Disabled 10Mbs Half 25 Enabled Up Off Enabled 100Mbs Half 26 Enabled Up Off Disabled 100Mbs Half 27 Enabled Down Off Disabled 100Mbs Half 28 Enabled Down On Disabled 100Mbs Half Switch Enable On Enabled 100Mbs Half Press Ctrl P to display choices for ports 1 14 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice pow Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main iM Figure 3 22 Port Configuration Screen 2 of 2 Table 3 19 describes the Port Configuration screen fields Table 3 19 Port Configuration Screen Fields Field Descripti
21. IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Workgroups on page 1 36 MultiLink Trunks MultiLink Trunks on page 1 61 Port Mirroring Port Mirroring Conversation Steering on page 1 80 IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping on page 1 52 309985 B Rev 00 C 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Configuring 802 1Q VLANs To create or modify an 802 1Q VLAN follow the flowcharts in Figures C 1 to C 3 Choose VLAN Configuration or press v from the VLAN Configuration Menu screen to open the VLAN Configuration screen VLAN Configuration screen Select the appropriate value for the Create VLAN field Select the appropriate value for the VLAN Type field Is VLAN Type Select the appropriate PID Port Based value for the PID field Yes user defined Enter the user defined PID value Key gt Off page reference O On page reference Activate VLAN State BS41049B Figure C 1 Configuring 802 1Q VLANs 1 of 3 C 2 309985 B Rev 00 Configure Port Members as Tagged Port Member Untagged Port Member or Not a Member of VLAN see VLAN Configuration Rules for more information VLAN Port members Configured Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Choose VLAN Port Configuration or press c to open the VLAN Port Configuration screen Set the Port field as appropriate for your configuration Is PVID correct Set PVID Key
22. Table 3 9 describes the MAC Address Security Port Configuration screen fields 309985 B Rev 00 3 29 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 9 MAC Address Security Port Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Unit Allows you to select the unit number when stacking is configured to view or configure To view or configure another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers Port Indicates the switch port numbers that correspond to the field values in that row of the screen for example the field values in row 2 apply to switch port 2 The values that you set in the Switch row will affect all switch ports and when the switch is part of a stack the values that you set in the Stack row will affect all ports in the entire stack Trunk The read only data displayed in this column indicates the MultiLink Trunks that correspond to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields of the Trunk Configuration screen Security Allows you to enable or disable the MAC address security for the specified port Default Disabled Range Disabled Enabled 3 30 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface MAC Address Security Port Lists The MAC Address Security Port Lists screens allow you to create port lists that can be used as allowed source port lists for a specified MAC address in the MAC Address Security Table screen You can create as many as 32 port l
23. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP Address to Ping 0 0 0 0 Start Ping No Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice s Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Bi Figure 3 3 IP Configuration Setup Screen Note The read only fields in this screen are updated based on the BootP mode specified in the BootP Request Mode field See Choosing a BootP Request Mode on page 3 10 for more information Table 3 2 describes the IP Configuration Setup screen fields 3 8 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 2 Using the Console Interface IP Configuration Setup Screen Fields Field Description BootP Request Mode Configurable In Use Last BootP In Band Stack IP Address In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask One of four modes of operation for BootP See Choosing a BootP Request Mode on page 3 10 for details about the four modes Default Value BootP Disabled Range BootP Disabled BootP or Last Address BootP When Needed BootP Always Column header for the user configurable fields in this screen The data displayed in this column represents parameters that you can configure or that are currently configured Column header for the read only fields in this screen The read only data displayed in this column represents data that is currently in use Column header for the read only fields in this screen The read only
24. 1 85 giis COn aN m TER 2 2 Positioning the Chassis In the POR uertice peret nter inet esa ES 2 5 Attaching Mounting Brackets sasies 2 6 Installing the Switch in an Equipment Rack sss 2 6 TOBASE T Pott CODDSDIONS scope ad Pita ee erba add kr va dtd bd 2 8 Liber Optio Port DOnDIBPE DITE usen cavae birra sad Y vada iaai before 2 9 Connecting to the Console Comm Port sessseeeeeeeee 2 11 BayStack 410 24T Switch AC Power Receptacle ss 2 13 Grounded AC Power Outlet iiie t eera deseen tad atte ctl pue eieren ia 2 13 Observing LEDs to Verify Proper Operation sessssss 2 14 BayStack 410 24T Switch Self Test Screen sssssssssss 2 15 309985 B Rev 00 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 309985 B Rev 00 Nortel Networks Logo Sereen uus c buccina cb rac du cle 2 16 Mani MENU M 2 18 IP Configuration Setup Screen Standalone Switch 2 19 Mai
25. Enabled 5 8 22 8 23 Ji Normal Basic Enabled 6 3 2 172 7 2 5 6 Normal Basic Disabled Trunk Trunk Name 1 U3 T1 to FS2 2 U4 T2 to S2 3 U6 T3 to 2 4 U5 T4 to S83 5 US T5 to S4 6 Distributed Trunk Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice ress Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 25 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen Table 3 22 describes the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen fields Table 3 22 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Trunk Column header for the read only fields in this screen The read only data displayed in the Trunk column indicates the trunk 1 to 6 that corresponds to the switch ports specified in the user configurable Trunk Members fields Trunk Members The Trunk Members column contains fields in each row that can be configured to create Unit Port the corresponding trunk The Unit value in the Unit Port field is configurable only when the switch unit is part of a stack configuration It indicates that the trunk members in this row are associated with the specified unit number configured in the Unit field Each switch port can only be a member of a single trunk The appropriate trunk number for each trunk member configured within this field is shown adjacent to the corresponding Switch port in the following screens Port Configuration s
26. How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone Number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Santa Clara CA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 7041 xxviii 309985 B Rev 00 Chapter 1 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch This chapter introduces the BayStack 410 24T switch and covers the following topics e Physical description e Summary of features e Network configuration examples e Overview of main features Description The BayStack 410 24T switch see Figure 1 1 provides high performance low cost full duplex and half duplex connections to IOBASE T local area networks LANs With the addition of optional media dependent adapters MDAs the BayStack 410 24T switch can support high speed connections to servers shared fast Ethernet hubs or backbone devices BayStack 410 24T BS41001A Figure 1 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch 309985 B Rev 00 14 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Front Panel Figure 1 2 shows the BayStack 410 24T switch front panel Descr
27. No interrumpa la alimentaci n del dispositivo durante el proceso de descarga del software Si lo hace puede alterar la imagen de la programaci n firmware Attenzione Non interrompere l alimentazione elettrica al dispositivo durante il processo di scaricamento del software In caso di interruzione l immagine firmware potrebbe danneggiarsi D i OF OF OF QD ES UTZROITE 4SoDn ELCUSE Ya A APERE DTOT ESN BREMAE 27 Lh9ri70434 24 148542 hidUXY 3 102 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Choose Software Download or press f from the main menu to open the Software Download screen Software Download UN Image Filename b410 300 img TFTP Server IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Start TFTP Load of New Image No Enter text press Return or Enter when complete ap Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 43 Software Download Screen Table 3 37 describes the Software Download screen fields Table 3 37 Software Download Screen Fields Field Description Image Filename The software image load file name Note Certain software releases may require you to download two images the boot code image and the agent image For proper operation of the switch the new boot code image must be downloaded before the agent image is downloaded Default Value Zero length string Range An ASCII string of up to 3
28. Ports 22 and 24 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 5 STP Learning indicates the spanning tree participation setting for each of the trunks Trunks 1 through 4 are enabled for Normal STP Learning Trunk 5 is enabled for Fast STP Learning Trunk Mode read only indicates the Trunk Mode for each of the trunks The Trunk Mode field values for trunks 1 to 5 are set to Basic Source MAC addresses are statically assigned to specific trunk members for flooding and forwarding This allows the switch to stabilize and distribute the data streams of source addresses across the trunk members Trunk Status indicates the Trunk Status for each of the trunks When set to Enabled the configuration settings for that specific trunk are activated Trunk Name indicates optional fields for assigning names to the corresponding configured trunks The names chosen for this example provide meaningful information to the user of this switch for example S1 T1 to FS2 indicates that Trunk 1 in switch S1 connects to File Server 2 309985 B Rev 00 Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S2 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch As shown in Figure 1 40 on page 1 63 switch S2 is set up with two trunk configurations T2 and T3 Both trunks connect directly to switch S1 As in the previous screen examples to set up a trunk configuration choose MultiLink Trunk Configuration from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen Figure 1 43 sho
29. TFTP Server IP Address 3 108 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Display Event Log This section describes the various functions of the Event Log screen Figure 3 45 When the switch is part of a stack configuration the Event Log screen displays only the data for the specific unit you are connected to through the Console Comm port However if you are connected to a stack unit through a TELNET session the Event Log screen displays the data for the base unit of that stack configuration Note This screen does not refresh dynamically to show new entries To refresh the screen press Ctrl P Choose Display Event Log or press e from the main menu to open the Event Log screen d Event Log ES Entry Number 4 sysUpTime 00 14 36 Reset Count 2 Connection logout IP address 38 227 40 8 access mode no security Entry Number 3 SysUpTime 00 13 35 Reset Count 2 Connection logout IP address 38 227 40 8 access mode no security Entry Number 2 sysUpTime 00 00 53 Reset Count 2 Successful connection from IP address 38 227 40 8 access mode no security Entry Number 1 sysUpTime 00 00 00 Reset Count 1 Software downloaded to BayStack Model 410 24T HW Revx FW Vx xx SW Vx x x x Press Ctrl P to see previous display Press Ctrl N to s mor ntries a Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main T Figure 3 45 Event Log Scr
30. The local segment is also the broadcast domain because any broadcast is sent to all stations on the local segment Although Ethernet switches and bridges divide a network into smaller collision domains they do not affect the broadcast domain In simple terms a virtual local area network provides a mechanism to fine tune broadcast domains Your BayStack 410 24T switch allows you to create two types of VLANs e Port based VLANs A port based VLAN is a VLAN in which the ports are explicitly configured to be in the VLAN When you create a port based VLAN you assign a Port VLAN Identifier PVID and specify which ports belong to the VLAN The PVID is used to coordinate VLANs across multiple switches e Protocol based VLANs A protocol based VLAN is a VLAN in which you assign your switch ports as members of a broadcast domain based on the protocol information within the packet Protocol based VLANS can localize broadcast traffic and assure that only the protocol based VLAN ports are flooded with the specified protocol type packets Your switch ports can be members of multiple protocol based VLANs that are not based on the same protocol Only tagged ports can be members of multiple protocol based VLANS that are based on the same protocol BayStack 410 24T switches support up to 64 port based or protocol based VLANs When a switch port is configured to be a member of a VLAN it is added to a group of ports workgroup that belong to one broadca
31. Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch StackProbe Monitor port E gl port 23 EXE 1 rp T2 gla g BS41038A Figure 1 52 Address Based Mirroring Configuration Example In this configuration the designated monitor port port 23 can be set to monitor traffic in any of the following modes Monitor all traffic transmitted from address A to any address Monitor all traffic received by address A from any address Monitor all traffic received by or transmitted by address A Monitor all traffic transmitted by address A to address B Monitor all traffic between address A and address B conversation between the two stations Figure 1 53 shows the Port Mirroring Configuration screen setup for this example 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch In this example port 23 becomes the designated Monitor Port for switch S1 when you press Enter in response to the Yes screen prompt Note The screen data displayed at the bottom of the screen changes to show the new currently active port mirroring configurati
32. of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Nortel Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Nortel Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Nortel Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Nortel Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Nortel Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licen
33. 00 1 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch LED Display Panel Figure 1 3 shows the LED display panels used with the BayStack 410 24T switch 1 Cas m Pwr Up ail Status Dwn 2 m RPSU Base mE BayStack 410 24T Switch Pn ie Bei fe aub 9 11 18 15 17 19 21 23 EH EH NH NH NH NH EN GS Lik EH EH NE NH NH ONE NN HH Activity 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 EH EH EH NH NH o EM NN GN Link EH EE NEM EN NH ONE NN NH Activity ew Dual color LED BayStack 410 24T BS41003A Figure 1 3 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Display Panel Table 1 1 provides descriptions of the LEDs Table 1 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions Label Type Color State Meaning Pwr Power status Green On DC power is available to the switch s internal circuitry Off No AC power to switch or power supply failed Status System status Green On Self test passed successfully and switch is operational Blinking A nonfatal error occurred during the self test Off The switch failed the self test RPSU RPSU status Green On The switch is connected to the HRPSU and can receive power if needed Off The switch is not connected to the HRPSU or HRPSU is not supplying power continued 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Table 1 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions continued Label Type Color State Meaning CAS Up Stack mode Off The switch is in standalone mode Green On T
34. 00 3 89 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 32 describes the Renumber Stack Units screen options Table 3 32 Renumber Stack Units Screen Options Option Description Current Unit Number MAC Address New Unit Number Renumber units with new setting Read only fields listing the current unit number of each of the configured stack units The entries in this column are displayed in order of their current physical cabling with respect to the base unit and can show nonconsecutive unit numbering if one or more units were previously moved or modified The entries can also include unit numbers of units that are no longer participating in the stack not currently active Read only field listing the MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the Current Unit Number field User settable field showing the current unit number of each unit in the stack You can change any of the fields as required You can also delete entries by typing zero 0 or using the space bar to clear the field when the unit is not in the stack Default Value Current stack order Range 1to8 Specifies whether to start the renumbering process default is No Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes Renumbering resets the switch with the current configuration values When you select this option the switch resets runs a self test then displays the Nortel Networks logo screen After you press Cirl Y at the screen prompt the
35. 24T switch by observing the front panel LEDs or by viewing the self test results as displayed in the BayStack 410 24T switch Self Test screen Verifying the Installation Using the LEDs Table 2 1 To verify the installation using the LEDs check that the switch power up sequence is as described in Table 2 1 Power Up Sequence Stage Description LED indication 1 Immediately after AC power is applied to the switch DC power is available to the switch s internal circuitry 2 The switch initiates a self test The Power LED turns on within 5 seconds Figure 2 10 If the Power LED does not turn on verify that power is available at the AC power outlet and that the power cable is fastened securely at both ends If the Power LED remains off contact the sales agent or the customer service representative from whom you purchased the switch As subroutines are initiated by the self test the port status LEDs flash various patterns When the switch passes the self test within 10 seconds the Status LED turns on Figure 2 10 If a nonfatal error occurs during self test the Status LED blinks If the switch fails the self test the Status LED remains off Contact the sales agent or the customer service representative from whom you purchased the switch Power LED Status LED Figure 2 10 BayStack 410 24T Switch irm yum BS41044A Obse
36. 3 48 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 16 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description The Port Membership field in the VLAN Configuration screen is dependent on the Tagging field value see the Port Membership field description in Table 3 13 on page 3 41 Default Range VLAN Display by Port Untagged Access Untagged Access Tagged Trunk The VLAN Display by Port screen Figure 3 17 allows you to view VLAN characteristics associated with a specified switch port Choose VLAN Display by Port or press d from the VLAN Configuration Menu screen to open the VLAN Display by Port screen VLAN Display by Port N Unit Port PVID VLANS VLAN Name 1 VLAN 1 Use space bar to display choices d Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main is Port Name p J 12 iL Unit 1 Port 12 VLANs VLAN Name press lt Return gt or lt I Enter to select choice Figure 3 19 VLAN Display by Port Screen 309985 B Rev 00 3 49 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 17 describes the VLAN Display by Port screen fields Table 3 17 VLAN Display by Port Screen Fields Field Description Unit Allows you to select the unit number when stacking is configured to view To view another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers Port Allows y
37. A Out cable becomes unit 2 and the next unit is unit 3 and so on until the maximum stack configuration up to 8 units is reached If the base unit is changed to another unit in the stack the new base unit keeps its original unit number in the stack 309985 B Rev 00 1 29 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Stack MAC Address The Stack MAC address is automatically assigned during the stack initialization The base unit s MAC address with a software offset is used for the Stack MAC address For example if the base unit s MAC address is 00 00 82 99 44 00 and the Stack software offset is IF then the Stack MAC address becomes 00 00 82 99 44 1F If another unit in the stack is assigned as the base unit the MAC address of the new base unit with offset now applies to the stack configuration The original stack IP address still applies to the new base unit Temporary Base Unit If an assigned base unit fails the next unit in the stack order automatically becomes the new temporary base unit This change is indicated by the Base LED on the temporary base unit s LED display panel turning on yellow For detailed information about the base LED see Table 1 1 on page 1 4 This automatic process is a temporary safeguard only If the stack configuration loses power the temporary base unit will not power up as the base unit when power is restored For this reason you should always assign the temporary base unit as the bas
38. Configuration 7 Unit 2 Autonegotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Preferred Phy Right Active Phy None Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 23 High Speed Flow Control Configuration Screen Table 3 20 describes the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields Table 3 20 High Speed Flow Control Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Unit Allows you to select the unit number when stacking is configured to view or configure To view or configure another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers the system only displays a screen for units that are configured with a gigabit MDA Autonegotiation When enabled the port only advertises support for 1000 Mb s operation in full duplex mode Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 55 Using the BaySt ack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 20 High Speed Flow Control Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Flow Control Allows you to control traffic and avoid congestion on the gigabit MDA port Two Preferred Phy Active Phy modes are available see Choosing a High Speed Flow Control Mode on page 3 56 for details about the two modes Autonegotiation must be disabled for this po
39. E cc A did E EE ANE NEA dn 1 44 VLAN VWorkarop SUDIITIBEY osse piestbbee y ladanbne nnee i oculi daba cert due beoe d a dar On eas 1 49 VLAN GORIGUESUOIT RUES e E Mose aar E RH TR E Ebr Rd Een i Kad PUR 1 51 E aM MUN soak seca Ra Mui oou Gar ged uuu eain D GU ad dl aca Mn bobo SM E 1 52 IGMP Shooping Configuration Ule cucecesacciace sonet tn tad eue Sora p pnt e nieto Se tne nce ceni 1 56 EER 1P P TONE T NP 1 57 ut MIS cde e e meat oieeetianmectniers 1 61 Client Server Configuration Using MultiLink Trunks eeeeesee 1 62 Trunk Configuration Screen Examples 1 seceiiieee re kanko ett kennt nui tain 1 64 Trunk Gonfiguration Screen for Switch IST Luces tesi inet tintas rera dtt entra aree 1 64 Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S2 sess 1 67 Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S3 eeesssssssssss 1 69 Trunk Configuration Screen Tor Switeh G4 ecsecseie ccr runter ene 1 71 Batorbe Carp TUnKS cc aber a aE E ODD a lod d er RR RR 1 73 M liLink Tr nking Contig ration Rules sissien 1 73 How the MultiLink Trunk Reacts to Losing Distributed Trunk Members 1 75 Spanning Tree Considerations for MultiLink Trunks seeeeeee 1 76 Additional Tips About the MultiLink Trunking Feature eene 1 79 Part Mirroring Conversation Steering 125 55 t p c e etae e VERI RR OR RE RA ORE NER aentens 1 80 Port Based Mi
40. FF FF FF MAC Address Based Security The MAC Address Security Configuration Menu screen Figure 3 8 allows you to choose the appropriate screen to specify a range of system responses to unauthorized network access to your switch The system response can range from sending a trap to disabling the port The network access control is based on the MAC addresses of the authorized stations You can specify a list of up to 448 MAC addresses within a single standalone switch or within one or more units in a single stacked configuration that are authorized to access the switch or stack You can also specify the ports that each MAC address is allowed to access The options for allowed port access include NONE ALL and single or multiple ports that are specified in a list for example 1 1 4 2 6 3 9 etc see Accelerator Keys for Repetitive Tasks on page 3 33 3 22 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface When the switch software detects a security violation you can set the system to respond in any of the following ways e Send a trap e Turn on destination address DA filtering Disable the specific port You can also combine any of the three options listed above Choose MAC Address Based Security or press s from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to display the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu screen d MAC Address Security Configuration Menu B MAC Address Security Configuration MAC Address
41. Indicates the Forward Delay parameter value specified by management for this bridge This parameter takes effect only when this bridge becomes the root bridge The Forward Delay parameter value specifies the amount of time that the bridge ports remain in the Listening and Learning states before entering the Forwarding state Note that all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Forward Delay parameter value See also Forward Delay Default Value 15 seconds Range 4 to 30 seconds 3 98 309985 B Rev 00 TELNET Configuration Using the Console Interface The TELNET Configuration screen Figure 3 42 allows you to communicate with the BayStack 410 24T switch from a remote console terminal You can have up to four active TELNET sessions at one time Choose TELNET Configuration or press t from the main menu to open the TELNET Configuration screen ELNET Configuration ELNET Access Enabled Login Timeout 1 minute Login Retries 3 Inactivity Timeout 15 minutes Event Logging All Allowed Source IP Address Allowed Source Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 259 259 255 255 259 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255b 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255b 255 25542554 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 25525562594255 255 255 25
42. Limiting Configuration screens Note If a port is configured for rate limiting and it is a MultiLink trunk member all trunk member ports implement rate limiting Also if a trunk member is implementing rate limiting and the port is disabled from rate limiting all trunk members are disabled from rate limiting Choose Rate Limiting Configuration or press 1 from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the Rate Limiting Configuration screen 2 E Rate Limiting Configuration Unit 1 Port Packet Type Limit Last 5 Minutes Last Hour Last 24 Hours 1 Both None 56 0 22 0 23 0 2 Multicast 9 30 0 27 0 55 0 3 Both None 25 0 24 0 67 0 4 Both 10 72 0 33 0 55 0 5 Broadcast 10 35 0 54 0 78 0 6 Multicast 10 96 0 45 0 87 0 7 Both 10 86 0 67 0 60 0 8 Both 5 58 0 44 0 70 0 9 Multicast None 11 0 87 0 65 0 10 Both None 27 0 89 0 44 0 11 Both None 15 0 66 0 66 0 12 Both None 12 0 98 0 99 0 13 Both None 44 0 33 0 89 0 14 Both None 34 0 45 0 76 0 More Press Ctrl N to display choices for additional ports Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu X Pi Figure 3 29 Rate Limiting Configuration Screen 1 of 2 3 68 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface g N Rate Limiting Configuration Unites Ei P
43. More Press Ctrl N to display choices for ports 13 26 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to Press C to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to retu ect choice to Main Menu S1 Port Configuration screen rex S1 Baystack 41024T Swich NETWORKS olie ok ss NORTEL BayStack 410 24T Switch S2 Cr ABk yvy voy v3 spe Gels 9 AAA RR A Spanning Tree Port Configuration Port Path Cost State 1 Enabled Forwarding 2 Enabled 100 Forwarding 3 Enabled 100 Forwarding 4 Enabled 100 Forwarding 5 Enabled 100 Forwarding 6 Enabled 100 Forwarding F 1 Enabled 33 Forwarding 8 Enabled 100 Forwarding 9 1 Enabled 33 Forwarding 10 Enabled 100 Forwarding u 1 Enabled 33 Forwarding 12 Enabled 100 Forwarding More Press Ctrl N to display choices for ports 13 26 to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Press Ctrl R S2 Port Configuration screen BS41035A Figure 1 48 Example 1 Correctly Configured Trunk 309985 B Rev 00 1 77 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch If switch S2 s trunk member port 11 i
44. Normal Basic Enabled 2 25 26 Z IE Normal Basic Enabled 3 2 ID 4 Z IE Z Normal Basic Enabled 4 14 1L 16 JL Normal Basic Enabled 5 22 7 24 Ji Z JL Fast Basic Enabled 6 Ji i 7 lt Normal Basic Disabled Trunk Trunk Name 1 S1 Tl1 to FS2 2 Sl r2 to 2 3 Sl TS to S2 4 Si TA to S3 5 S1 T5 to S4 6 Trunk 6 Enter text press Return or Enter when complete Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 1 42 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S1 Switch S1 is configured as follows e Trunk read only indicates the trunks 1 to 6 that correspond to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields Trunk Members Unit Port indicates the ports that can be configured in each row to create the corresponding trunk Note The Unit value in the Unit Port field cannot be configured when the switch is operating standalone For detailed information about the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen fields see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 Ports 15 17 19 and 21 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 1 Ports 25 and 26 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 2 309985 B Rev 00 1 65 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Ports 2 and 4 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 3 Ports 14 and 16 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 4
45. Packets C Multicasts 0 Multicasts a Broadcasts 0 Broadcasts b Total Octets 0 Total Octets C Lost Packets 0 Lost Packets C Packets 64 bytes 0 Packets 64 bytes C 65 127 bytes 0 65 127 bytes C 128 255 bytes 0 128 255 bytes C 256 511 bytes 0 256 511 bytes C 512 1023 bytes 0 512 1023 bytes E 1024 1518 bytes 0 1024 1518 bytes C FCS Errors 0 Collisions C Undersized Packets 0 Single Collisions 0 Oversized Packets 0 ultiple Collisions C Filtered Packets 0 Excessive Collisions C Flooded Packets 0 Deferred Packets C Frame Errors 0 Late Collisions C Use space bar to display choices or enter text Press Ctrl Z to zero counters Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu A Figure 3 34 Port Statistics Screen 3 78 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 30 describes the Port Statistics screen fields Table 3 30 Note In a stacked configuration the Port Statistics screen appears in a slightly different format when the port selected in the Unit Port field is configured with a gigabit MDA Port Statistics Screen Fields Field Description Unit Port Packets Multicasts Broadcasts Total Octets Lost Packets Only appears if the switch is participating in a stack configuration The field allows you to select the number of the unit you want to view or configure To view or configure another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar on your
46. S CRC Data Tag SA DA a queue a Low Recalculated Port 6 Port7 Ports Untagged member fo CRC 8100 Priority 6 CFI VID 2 of VLAN 2 n 16 bits 3bits 1bit 12 bits Data After SA Outgoing Key untagged packet DA unchanged Priority User priority CFI Canonical format indicator VID VLAN identifier Figure 1 34 Prioritizing Packets BS41029A The newly tagged frame is read within the switch and sent to the port s high or low transmit queue for disposition see Figure 1 35 The port transmit queue example shown in Figure 1 35 applies to all ports on the BayStack 410 24T switch 309985 B Rev 00 1 57 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Port 5 Bau High priority 7 packet 6 gt ue ES 4 Port transmit User priority P 3 3 L L OWN Low L 0 BS41030A Figure 1 35 Port Transmit Queue As shown in Figure 1 35 the switch provides two transmission queues a High transmission queue and a Low transmission queue for any given port Frames are assigned to one of these queues on the basis of user_priority using a traffic class table This table is managed by using the Traffic Class Configuration screen Figure 1 36 The table indicates the corresponding traffic class that is assigned to the frame for each possible user_priority value If the frame leaves the switch form
47. Security Port Configuration MAC Address Security Port Lists MAC Address Security Table Return to Switch Configuration Menu Use arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option MEE Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main mue d Figure 3 8 MAC Address Security Configuration Menu Table 3 7 describes the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu options 309985 B Rev 00 3 23 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 7 MAC Address Security Configuration Menu Options Option Description MAC Address Security Displays the MAC Address Security Configuration screen see MAC Configuration Address Security Configuration on page 3 24 This screen allows you to Enable or Disable the MAC Address Security feature MAC Address Security Displays the MAC Address Security Port Configuration screen see MAC Port Configuration Address Security Port Configuration on page 3 28 This screen allows you to Enable or Disable MAC Security for each port MAC Address Security Displays the MAC Address Security Port Lists screen see MAC Address Port Lists Security Port Lists on page 3 31 This screen allows you to create port lists that can be used as an allowed source port list for a MAC address in the MAC Address Security Table screen MAC Address Security Displays the MAC Address Security Table screen see MAC Address Table Security
48. Settings Table E 1 lists the factory default settings for the BayStack 410 24T switch Table E 1 Appears in this CI screen Field Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch Default setting IP Configuration Setup page 3 8 BootP Request Mode In Band Stack IP Address In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask Default Gateway IP Address to Ping Start Ping BootP Disabled 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned 0 0 0 0 no subnet mask assigned 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned No SNMP Configuration page 3 13 Read Only Community String Read Write Community String Trap IP Address Community String Authentication Trap Link Up Down Trap public private 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Zero length string Enabled Enabled continued 309985 B Rev 00 E 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table E 1 Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch continued Appears in this CI screen Field Default setting System Characteristics page 3 15 Reset Count Last Reset Type Power Status 1 Power Cycle Primary Power sysContact Zero length string sysName Zero length string sysLocation Zero length string MAC Address Table page 3 20 Aging Time 300 seconds Find an Address Port Mirroring Address A Port Mirroring Address B 0
49. Status for each of the trunks When set to Enabled the configuration settings for that specific trunk are activated Trunk Name indicates optional fields for assigning names to the corresponding configured trunks The names chosen for this example provide meaningful information to the user of this switch for example S3 T4 to S1 indicates that Trunk 1 in switch S3 connects to Switch 1 1 70 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S4 As shown in Figure 1 40 switch S4 is set up with one trunk configuration T5 This trunk connects directly to switch S1 As in the previous screen examples to set up a trunk configuration choose MultiLink Trunk Configuration from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen Figure 1 45 shows the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen for switch S4 i MultiLink Trunk Configuration UN Trunk Trunk Members Unit Port STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Status T gt IE XX Th E Normal Basic Enabled 2 qu z lt Jt Normal Basic Disabled 3 lt D A Jt Normal Basic Disabled 4 jo c lt Lb of Normal Basic Disabled 5 LI y E E Jt Normal Basic Disabled 6 lt Ik 24 Jt Normal Basic Disabled Trunk Trunk Name 1 4 T5 to S1 2 Trunk 2 3 Trunk 3 4 Trunk 44 5 Trunk 5 6 Trunk 6 Enter text press Return or Enter when complete
50. Switch A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure other stacks that have the same number of switches firmware version model types and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the donor unit For example the configuration file parameters from a donor unit with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x The configuration file also duplicates any settings that exist for any MDA that is installed in the donor switch If you use the configuration file to configure another switch that has the same MDA model installed the configuration file settings will also apply to and override the existing MDA settings Table 3 40 Parameters Not Saved to the Configuration File These parameters are not saved Used in this screen See page In Band Stack IP Address IP Configuration Setup 3 8 In Band Switch IP Address In Band Subnet Mask Default Gateway Console Read Only Switch Password Console Comm Port Configuration 3 82 Console Read Write Switch Password Console Read Only Stack Password Console Read Write Stack Password Configuration Image Filename Configuration File Download Upload 3 106
51. T1 with two port members operating at 100 Mb s and two at 10 Mb s Trunk TI provides an aggregate bandwidth of 220 Mb s The Path Cost for T1 is 4 Path Cost 2 1000 LAN speed in Mb s Another three port trunk T2 is configured with an aggregate bandwidth of 210 Mb s and a comparable Path Cost of 4 When the Path Cost calculations for both trunks are equal the software chooses the trunk with the larger aggregate bandwidth T1 to determine the most efficient path 10Mb s 220 Mb s Ar AIR Bandwidth Aggregate Bandwidth 210 Mb s Key 10 Mb s 100 Mb s Figure 1 47 BS41062A Path Cost Arbitration Example The switch can also detect trunk member ports that are physically misconfigured For example in Figure 1 48 trunk member ports 2 4 and 6 of switch S1 are configured correctly to trunk member ports 7 9 and 11 of switch S2 The Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen for each switch shows the port state field for each port in the Forwarding state 1 76 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Spanning Tree Port Configuration Trunk Priority Path Co 128 100 Forwarding 1 128 33 Forwarding 128 100 Forwarding 1 128 33 Forwarding 128 100 Forwarding 1 128 33 128 100 128 100 128 100 128 100 128 100 128 100 Forwarding
52. Tag SA DA gt Port6 Port7 Port8 lu Untagged member a CRC Recalculated 8100 Priority CFI VID 2 of VLAN 2 16 bits 3 bits 1 bit 12 bits Data Outgoing After SA untagged packet changed Key DA tag removed Priority User priority CFI Canonical format indicator NZ VID VLAN identifier BS41019A Figure 1 20 802 1Q Tagging After 802 1Q Tag Assignment 1 40 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch VLANs Spanning Multiple Switches You can use VLANs to segment a network within a switch When connecting multiple switches it is possible to connect users of one VLAN with users of that same VLAN in another switch However the configuration guidelines depend on whether both switches support 802 1Q tagging With 802 1Q tagging enabled on a port fora VLAN all frames leaving the port for that VLAN are marked as belonging to that specific VLAN Users can assign specific switch ports as members of one or more VLANs that span multiple switches without interfering with the spanning tree protocol VLANs Spanning Multiple 802 1Q Tagged Switches Figure 1 21 shows VLANs spanning two BayStack 410 24T switches 802 1Q tagging is enabled on S1 port 2 and on S2 port 1 for VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 Both ports are tagged members of VLAN 1 and VLAN 2 nr VLAN2 nr VLAN 1 S1 BayStack
53. Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Gigabit Ports and BayStack 410 24T Switch Ports Restriction Gigabit ports and the BayStack 410 24T switch ports do not have the ability to assign incoming untagged frames to a protocol based VLAN To allow Gigabit ports and BayStack 410 24T switch ports to participate in protocol based VLANs you must set the Tagging field value in the VLAN Port Configuration screen to Tagged Trunk VLAN Port Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen Figure 3 18 allows you to configure specified switch ports with the appropriate PVID VLAN association that enables the creation of VLAN broadcast domains see Shared Servers on page 1 44 for more information about setting up VLAN broadcast domains You can configure specified switch ports to filter discard all received tagged frames untagged frames or unregistered frames see IEEE 802 1Q Tagging on page 1 37 You can also prioritize the order in which the switch forwards packets on a per port basis see IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing on page 1 57 Choose VLAN Port Configuration or press c from the VLAN Configuration Menu screen to open the VLAN Port Configuration screen 3 46 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface VLAN Port Configuration 5 Unit 1 Port 12 Filter Tagged Frames No Filter Untagged Frames No Filter Unregistered Frames No Port Name Unit 1 Port 12 PVIDS dj Port Priori
54. X interface Fixed ports 1 24 10BASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 8 pin modular connectors for MDI X interface Optional MDA ports 25 28 100BASE FX Fiber Optional MDA ports 25 28 only SC and MT RJ connectors for switched 100 Mb s 100BASE FX connections over 50 125 and 62 5 125 micron multimode fiber optic cable 2 km 6 562 ft maximum distance Safety Agency Certification UL Listed UL 1950 IEC 950 EN60950 CB report C22 2 No 950 cUL NOM NOM 019 Electromagnetic Emissions US CFR47 Part 15 Subpart B Class A Canada ICES 003 Issue 2 Class A Australia New Zealand AS NZS 3548 1995 Class A Japan V 3 97 04 1997 Class A Taiwan CNS 13438 Class A EN55022 1995 Class A EN61000 3 2 1995 EN61000 3 3 1994 309985 B Rev 00 A 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Electromagnetic Immunity EN50082 1 1997 Declaration of Conformity The Declaration of Conformity for the BayStack 410 24T switches complies with ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45014 The declaration identifies the product models the Nortel Networks name and address and the specifications recognized by the European community As stated in the Declaration of Conformity the BayStack 410 24T switches comply with the provisions of Council Directives 89 336 EEC and 73 23 EEC A4 309985 B Rev 00 Appendix B Media Dependent Adapters This appendix describes the optional media dependent adapters MDAs that are available from Norte
55. a port that is a protocol based VLAN member you cannot set this field value to No This restriction also applies if this port is a trunk member with a gigabit port or a port that is a protocol based VLAN member Default No Range No Yes Sets this port to filter discard all received unregistered packets Default No Range No Yes The default port name with associated stack unit number when configured assigned to this port You can change this field to any name that is up to 16 characters long Default Unit x Port x Range Any ASCII string of up to 16 printable characters Associates this port with a specific VLAN For example a port with a PVID of 3 assigns all untagged frames received on this port to VLAN 3 Default 1 Range 1 to 4094 Prioritizes the order in which the switch forwards packets received on specified ports see IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing on page 1 57 Default 0 Range 0107 Allows you to assign VLAN Port Membership tagging options to this port as follows Untagged Access Any VLAN that this port is a member of will not be 802 1Q tagged Tagged Trunk Any VLAN that this port is a member of will be 802 1Q tagged Restriction If this port is a gigabit port or a port that is a protocol based VLAN member you cannot set this field value to Untagged Access This restriction also applies if this port is a trunk member with a gigabit port or a port that is a protocol based VLAN member continued
56. be exposed to direct sunlight or near warm air exhausts or heaters See Port Connection Problems on page 4 6 Cycle the power to the switch disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord If the problem persists replace the switch Cycle the power to the switch disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord If the problem persists contact the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center Port Connection Problems You can usually trace port connection problems to either a poor cable connection or an improper connection of the port cables at either end of the link To remedy these types of problems make sure that the cable connections are secure and that the cables connect to the correct ports at both ends of the link Port connection problems are also traceable to the autonegotiation mode or the port interface 309985 B Rev 00 Troubleshooting Autonegotiation Modes Port connection problems can occur when a port is connected to a station that is not operating in a compatible mode for example connecting a full duplex port to a half duplex port The BayStack 410 24T switch negotiates port speeds according to the IEEE 802 3u autonegotiating standard The switch adjusts autonegotiates the port speed and duplex mode to match the best service provided by the connected station up to 100 Mb s in full duplex mode with an optional 1OOBASE T MDA installed e Ifthe connected station uses a form of autonegotiati
57. console screen temporarily displays the standalone BayStack 410 24T Main Menu Then within 20 seconds the console screen refreshes and displays the main menu screen for the stack configuration The Unit LEDs display the new numbering order Default Value No Range No Yes 3 90 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Hardware Unit Information The Hardware Unit Information screen Figure 3 37 lists the switch models including any installed MDA and Cascade modules that are configured in your standalone or stack configuration Choose Display Hardware Units or press h from the main menu to open the Hardware Unit Information screen Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Unit Cc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu S Hardware Unit Information Switch Model DA Model Cascade MDA BayStack 450 24T one 400 ST1 BayStack 450 12T 450 1SX 400 ST1 BayStack 450 24T 400 4FX 400 ST1 BayStack 410 24T 400 4FX 400 ST1 BayStack 450 24T one 400 ST1 BayStack 450 12T 450 1SX 400 ST1 BayStack 450 24T 400 4FX 400 ST1 BayStack 410 24T one 400 ST1 Figure 3 37 Hardware Unit Information Screen Spanning Tree Configuration The Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen Figure 3 38 allows you to view spanning tree parameters and configure individual switch ports to participate in the spanning tree algorithm STA T
58. dieses Ger t in einem Ger tegestell installieren stellen Sie die Ger te nicht direkt aufeinander Jedes Ger t mu mit entsprechenden Halterungen im Gestell befestigt werden Die Halterungen sind nicht daf r konzipiert mehrere Ger te zu tragen Attention Si cet appareil doit tre encastr dans un rack ne jamais empiler directement plusieurs unit s les unes sur les autres Chaque unit doit tre correctement fix e avec les membrures appropri es Les membrures ne sont pas con ues pour supporter le poids d unit s multiples e Precauci n Al montar este dispositivo apilado con otros dispositivos no apile las unidades directamente unas sobre otras Cada unidad se debe fijar a la estructura mediante los soportes de montaje adecuados Los soportes de montaje no est n disefiados para soportar varias unidades 2 4 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Attenzione Se il dispositivo viene installato su una cremagliera non impilarlo su un altro dispositivo montato sulla cremagliera Ciascuna unit deve essere fissata alla cremagliera con le apposite staffe di montaggio Tali staffe non possono essere utilizzate per fissare pi unit FE COT ANA ARS VICAR SRS A372 22s EHD 1 79 KO CERE EI LI CC ESU tl1 wrkii uuwmixdd227vFUCO2227I BEL X CTA faxd il2o7vrMHkii WEO1 sHkE xXAxS kim Enc The BayStack 410 24T switch occupies a 1 6 unit 1 6u rack space and can be
59. error codes that define the problem The error codes are described in Chapter 4 Troubleshooting When the download process is complete the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self test The BayStack 410 24T switch Self Test screen see Figure 2 11 on page 2 15 briefly displays the results and is followed by the Nortel Networks logo screen Press Ctrl Y from the Nortel Networks logo screen to access the BayStack 410 24T switch main menu 3 104 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface During the download process the BayStack 410 24T switch is not operational You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications Table 3 38 describes the LED indications during the software download process Note The LED indications described in Table 3 38 apply to a 24 port switch model Although a 12 port switch provides similar LED indications the LED indication sequence is associated within the 12 port range Table 3 38 LED Indications During the Software Download Process Phase Description LED Indications 1 The switch downloads the new software image The switch erases the flash memory The switch programs the new software image into the flash memory The switch resets automatically Link status LEDs ports 18 to 24 only The LEDs begin to turn on in succession beginning with port 24 which indicates the progress of the
60. example can provide meaningful information to the user for example S1 T1 to FS2 indicates Trunk 1 in switch S1 connects to File Server 2 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen The MultiLink Trunk Utilization screen Figure 3 26 and Figure 3 27 allows you to monitor the percentage of bandwidth used by configured trunk members You can choose the type of traffic to monitor Figure 3 26 shows an example of bandwidth utilization rates for the trunk member ports configured in Figure 3 25 Because two screens are required to show all of the configured trunks up to six the screen prompts users to Press Ctrl N to view trunks five and six Choose MultiLink Trunk Utilization or press u from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen to open the MultiLink Trunk Utilization screen 309985 B Rev 00 3 61 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch di MultiLink Trunk Utilization UN Trunk Traffic Type Unit Port Last 5 Minutes Last 30 Minutes Last Hour 1 Rx and Tx 3 6 90 0 70 0 90 0 3 7 20 0 55 0 80 0 3 9 35 0 45 0 45 0 3 17 85 0 35 0 20 0 2 Rx and Tx 4 25 45 0 45 0 50 0 4 26 25 0 70 0 35 0 3 Rx and Tx 6 13 35 0 35 0 50 0 6 14 30 0 80 0 710 0 4 Rx and Tx 5 19 40 0 35 0 75 0 5 20 25 0 70 0 85 0 More Press Ctrl N to display utilization for trunks 5 6 Use space bar to display choices press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt to select choice e Ctrl R to return to pr
61. flow control pause frames to the gigabit MDA port When a pause frame is received the receiving port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause release control frame is received In this mode the gigabit MDA port is disabled from transmitting pause frames to its link partner Use this mode when the gigabit MDA port is connected to a buffered repeater device MultiLink Trunk Configuration The MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen Figure 3 24 allows you to select the appropriate screen to configure up to six MultiLink trunks you can group up to four switch ports together to form each trunk You can configure up to six MultiLink trunks in each stack with trunk members in either a single unit or distributed between units within the stack configuration distributed trunking You can monitor the bandwidth usage for the trunk member ports within each trunk For more information about configuring MultiLink Trunks see MultiLink Trunks on page 1 61 Note When a trunk is not active Trunk Status field set to Disabled configuration changes do not take effect until you set the Trunk Status field to Enabled Choose MultiLink Trunk Configuration or press t from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen 309985 B Rev 00 3 57 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch a Use arrow keys to highlight o
62. gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41049C Figure C 2 Configuring 802 1Q VLANs 2 of 3 Quick Steps to Features 309985 B Rev 00 C 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Is VLAN tag Set Tagging field on correct VLAN Port Configuration screen Is filtering Set tagged untagged correct unregistered filters if necessary Is Set Port Priority Port Priority See also the Traffic Class correct Configuration screen if necessary Are all VLANs configured Key gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41051B Figure C 3 Configuring 802 1Q VLANs 3 of 3 C 4 309985 B Rev 00 Quick Steps to Features Configuring MultiLink Trunks To create or modify a MultiLink trunk follow the flowchart in Figure C 4 Choose MultiLink Trunk Configuration or press t from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen to open the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen Are all trunk members configured Configure trunk members see MultiLink Trunking Configuration Rules l k Sx e Configure STP field Enable Trunk Status field see MultiLink Trunking Configuration Rules Is trunk Enabled Key gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41052A Figure C 4 Configuring MultiLink Trunks 309985 B Rev 00 C 5 Using the BayStack 410 24
63. ha 0060fd000000 ip 192 0 0 1 hd c ezlan images bf b410_100 img Where host name bayl hardware type Ethernet MAC address 00 60 FD 00 00 00 IP address 192 0 0 1 home directory of boot file c ezlan images boot file b410_100 img F 2 309985 B Rev 00 A acronyms xxvi Actual Hello Interval 3 97 Aging Time field 3 21 Allowed Source IP Address field 3 101 Allowed Source Mask field 3 101 Authentication Trap field 3 14 Autonegotiation description 1 18 field 3 54 autonegotiation modes troubleshooting 4 6 Base unit 1 29 BayStack 410 24T switch connectors D 1 default port settings for VLANs 1 38 features 1 9 to 1 11 front panel 1 2 BootP Request Mode field 3 9 BootP See Bootstrap Protocol Bootstrap Protocol BootP Always setting 3 12 automatic IP configuration 1 20 BOOTPTAB TXT file F 1 choosing a request mode 3 10 Disabled setting 3 11 Last Address setting 3 11 sample configuration file F 1 When Needed setting 3 12 Bridge Forward Delay field 3 98 Bridge Hello Time field 3 98 309985 B Rev 00 Index Bridge Maximum Age Time field 3 98 Bridge Priority field 3 97 Broadcasts field 3 79 C cable for console comm port 2 10 Cascade module 1 27 Clear All Port Statistics option 3 20 Collisions field 3 81 Comm Port Data Bits field 3 82 Comm Port Parity field 3 82 Comm Port Stop Bits 3 83 Community String field 3 14 Configurable field 3 9 Confi
64. indicate this condition by lighting their Cas Up and Cas Dwn LEDs see Cas Up and Cas Dwn description in this table If the temporary base unit fails the next unit directly downstream from this unit becomes the new temporary base unit This process can continue until there are only two units left in the stack configuration continued 309985 B Rev 00 1 5 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 1 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions continued Label Type Color State Meaning Link 10 Mb s port Green speed indicator Green Activity Port activity Green On Blinking Off Blinking This automatic process is a temporary safeguard only If the stack configuration loses power the temporary base unit will not power up as the base unit when power is restored For this reason you should always assign the temporary base unit as the base unit set the Unit Select switch to Base until the failed unit is repaired or replaced The corresponding port is set to operate at 10 Mb s and the link is good The corresponding port has been disabled by software The link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Indicates network activity for the corresponding port A high level of network activity can cause the LEDs to appear to be on continuously Back Panel This section describes the BayStack 410 24T switch back panel components Figure 1 4 Descriptions of the back
65. indicates the Trunk Mode for each of the trunks The Trunk Mode field values for trunks 1 and 2 are set to Basic Source MAC addresses are statically assigned to specific trunk members for flooding and forwarding This allows the switch to stabilize and distribute the data streams of source addresses across the trunk members Trunk Status indicates the Trunk Status for each of the trunks When set to Enabled the configuration settings for that specific trunk are activated Trunk Name indicates optional fields for assigning names to the corresponding configured trunks The names chosen for this example provide meaningful information to the user of this switch for example S2 T2 to S1 indicates that Trunk 1 in switch S2 connects to Switch 1 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S3 As shown in Figure 1 40 on page 1 63 switch S3 is set up with one trunk configuration T4 This trunk connects directly to switch S1 As in the previous screen examples to set up an inter switch trunk configuration choose MultiLink Trunk Configuration from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen Figure 1 44 shows the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen for switch S3 MultiLink Trunk Configuration UN Trunk Trunk Members Unit Port STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Status 1 1 JE 7 3 JL Ji Normal Basic Enabled 2 Lil X hb Jt Normal Bas
66. installed in most standard 19 inch racks Ground the rack to the same grounding electrode used by the power service in the area The permanent ground path must not exceed 1 ohm of resistance from the rack to the grounding electrode To install the BayStack 410 24T switch in a rack 1 Determine how far you want the switch to protrude in front of the rack Figure 2 2 1 Flush with rack 2 Extended from rack BS41040A Figure 2 2 Positioning the Chassis in the Rack 309985 B Rev 00 2 5 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch There are three slots located on the sides of the chassis You can install the switch flush to the rack or extended from the rack depending on how you install the mounting brackets 2 Attach a mounting bracket to each side of the switch using the supplied screws inserted from the bottom of the chassis see Figure 2 3 1 Flush with rack 2 Extended from rack BS41041A Figure 2 3 Attaching Mounting Brackets 3 Position the switch in the rack and align the holes in the mounting bracket with the holes in the rack see Figure 2 4 L BS41058A Figure 2 4 Installing the Switch in an Equipment Rack 2 6 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch 4 Insert two screws appropriate for your 19 inch rack into each of the mounting brackets and tighten 5 After the switch is secured in the rack proceed to the next
67. into Blocking mode stations on VLAN 2 in switch S1 cannot communicate with stations in VLAN 2 on switch S2 With multiple links only one link will be forwarding 309985 B Rev 00 1 43 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Shared Servers BayStack 410 24T switches allow ports to exist in multiple VLANs for shared resources such as servers printers and switch to switch connections It is also possible to have resources exist in multiple VLANs on one switch as shown in Figure 1 24 In this example clients on different broadcast domains share resources The broadcasts from ports configured in VLAN 3 can be seen by all VLAN port members of VLAN 3 BayStack 410 24T switch S 1 oo ema ma e pess JL VLAN 1 PVID 1 VLAN 2 PVID 2 T VLAN 3 PVID 3 BS41023A Figure 1 24 Multiple VLANs Sharing Resources In order for the above configuration to operate as described the ports have to be set to participate as VLAN port members When this is done the switch establishes the appropriate broadcast domains within the switch see Figure 1 25 1 44 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch 1 VLAN 3 VLAN 2 VLAN 1 Key
68. keyboard to toggle the unit numbers Allows you to select the number of the port you want to view or reset to zero To view another port type its port number and press Enter or press the spacebar on your keyboard to toggle the port numbers Received column Indicates the total number of packets received on this port including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets Transmitted column Indicates the total number of packets transmitted successfully on this port including broadcast packets and multicast packets Received column Indicates the total number of good multicast packets received on this port excluding broadcast packets Transmitted column Indicates the total number of multicast packets transmitted successfully on this port excluding broadcast packets Received column Indicates the total number of good broadcast packets received on this port Transmitted column Indicates the total number of broadcast packets transmitted successfully on this port Received column Indicates the total number of octets of data including data in bad packets received on this port excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Transmitted column Indicates the total number of octets of data transmitted successfully on this port including FCS octets Received column Indicates the total number of packets lost discarded when the capacity of the port receive buffer was exceeded Transmitted column Indicates the to
69. mode of operation You can set both addresses by using the Console Comm Port or BootP which resides on the switch For more information about using the Console Comm Port to configure the switch see Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Flash Memory Storage The following two sections describe switch parameters that are stored in flash memory Switch Software Image Your switch s software image is stored in flash memory The flash memory allows you to update your switch software image with a newer version without changing the switch hardware see Software Download on page 3 102 An in band connection between the switch and the TFTP load host is required to download the software image If a BootP server is set up properly on the network and the BayStack 410 24T switch detects a corrupted software image during the self test the switch automatically uses TFTP to download a new software image Configuration Parameters Certain configuration parameters including the system characteristics strings some VLAN parameters IGMP configuration parameters and the MultiLink Trunk names are stored in flash memory These parameters are updated every 10 minutes or whenever you issue the Reset command Note Do not power off the switch within ten minutes of changing any configuration parameters unless you first issue the Reset command Powering down the switch with
70. o E RJ 45 connector A 10BASE T switch ports Pia Jee Figure 2 5 n il 400 4TX MDA y RJ 45 connector m 10BASE T 100BASE TX optional MDA ports BS41042B 10BASE T Port Connections 2 8 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Connecting Fiber Optic MDA Ports Connect devices to optional MDA fiber optic ports as shown in Figure 2 6 The 400 4FX MDA is a 100BASE FX device that uses MT RJ port connectors with 62 5 125 micron multimode fiber optic cable The 400 2FX MDA is also a 100BASE FX device but uses standard SC port connectors with 62 5 125 micron multimode fiber optic cable N RTEL NETWORKS dem BayStack 410 24T Switch Ge BayStack 410 24T 400 4FX MDA E Gb r 269 400 2FX MDA Teile feile zz 400 2FX MDA MT RJ connector D SC connector BS41063A Figure 2 6 Fiber Optic Port Connections 309985 B Rev 00 2 9 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Console Comm Port The serial console interface is an RS 232 port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring a standalone switch or a stack configuration You can also connect this port to an external modem to enable remo
71. panel components follow the figure 1 100 240V 47 63HZ 1 5A 600ma Cascade Module Redundant Power 1 AC power receptacle 2 RPSU connector 3 Cascade Module Slot BS41004A Figure 1 4 BayStack 410 24T Switch Back Panel 1 6 309985 B Rev 00 AC Power Receptacle Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord supplied For installation outside of North America make sure that you have the proper power cord for your region Any cord used must have a CEE 22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320 030 specifications Table 1 2 lists specifications for international power cords Table 1 2 International Power Cord Specifications Country Plug description Specifications Typical plug Australia AS3112 1981 Male plug Continental Europe CEE7 standard VII male plug Harmonized cord HAR marking on the outside of the cord jacket to comply with the CENELEC Harmonized Document HD 21 U S Canada Japan NEMA5 15P male plug UL recognized UL stamped on cord jacket CSA certified CSA label secured to the cord United Kingdom BS1363 male plug with fuse Harmonized cord 240 VAC 50 Hz Single phase 220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz Single phase 100 or 120 VAC 50 60 Hz Single phase 240 VAC 50 Hz Single phase 230FA 228FA 227FA 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Ba
72. port basis SNMP agent support for the following management information bases MIBs SNMPv2 RFC 1907 Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 RMON MIB RFC 1757 MIB II RFC 1213 Interface MIB RFC 1573 Nortel Networks proprietary MIBs s5Chas MIB ssAgent MIB Rapid City MIB High speed uplink expansion slot Allows you to attach optional media dependent adapters MDAs that support a range of media types Rate limiting Adjustable broadcast or IP Multicast packet rate limits for control of broadcast and IP Multicast storms 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Console Comm port Allows users to configure and manage the switch locally or remotely Virtual local area networks VLANS supporting IEEE 802 1Q port based VLANs Protocol based VLANs TELNET Support for up to four simultaneous TELNET sessions Optional password protection Login time out Failed login guard Inactivity time out Allowed source addresses Event logging IEEE 802 1Q port based virtual LANs VLANs IGMP snooping IEEE 802 1p prioritizing MultiLink Trunking supporting Switch to switch trunks Switch to server trunks Port mirroring conversation steering Port based MAC address based IEEE 802 3u compliant optional MDA autonegotiation ports with four modes JOBASE T half duplex JOBASE T full duplex JOOBASE TX half du
73. section Attaching Devices to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Attaching Devices to the BayStack 410 24T Switch This section describes how to attach devices to the BayStack 410 24T switch ports and how to connect a console terminal to the switch Console Comm port You can use the console terminal to observe the power on self test results and set up the switch if required as described later in this chapter The BayStack 410 24T switch has an Uplink Expansion slot that allows you to attach optional media dependent adapters MDAs The MDAs support a range of media types see Appendix B Media Dependent Adapters for more information about MDA types available from Nortel Networks Refer to the documentation that came with your specific MDA for information about its cabling and LED indications BayStack 410 24T switches provide Fail Safe stackability when you install the optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module to your switches Installation instructions are provided with the cascade module Depending on your network configuration requirements connect the RJ 45 port cables the console port and any optional MDA port cables as described in the following sections After attaching the devices to the BayStack 410 24T switch proceed to Connecting Power on page 2 12 to connect the AC power cord and power up the switch You can connect the BayStack 410 24T switch to any equipment that conforms to the IEEE 802 3 standard such as t
74. stack must be configured as the base unit all other units in the stack must have their Unit Select switch set to Off see Unit Select Switch on page 1 28 Any single unit in the stack can be assigned as the base unit Note Although any single unit in the stack can be assigned as the base unit when mixing BayStack models in a single stack Nortel Networks recommends that you assign the unit with the highest bandwidth as the base unit The additional workload of the base unit is optimized by using the higher bandwidth model switch The physical ordering of all of the other units in the stack is determined by the position of the base unit within the stack This is important for management applications that view the physical ordering of the units within the stack Some characteristics of the base unit are described in the following sections Initial Installation During the initial installation of the stack the software automatically determines the physical order of all units in the stack according to the position of the base unit within the stack Thereafter the individual units maintain their original unit numbering even if the position of one or more units in the stack is changed you can renumber the units using the Renumber Stack Units screen see Renumber Stack Units on page 3 89 For example when the stack is initially powered up the base unit becomes unit 1 and the unit that the base unit connects to via the Cascade
75. submenus for these options are described in the following sections Note Some menu options shown in this main menu example and in other screen examples in this chapter may not appear on your screen depending on the switch options installed However the full menu options are shown in the screen examples and described in the following sections di BayStack 410 24T Main Menu IP Configuration Setup SNMP Configuration System Characteristics Switch Configuration Identify Unit Numbers Renumber Stack Units Display Hardware Units Spanning Tree Configuration TELNET Configuration Software Download Configuration File Display Event Log Reset Reset to Default Settings Logout Console Comm Port Configuration ES rdi arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select idi Figure 3 2 Console Interface Main Menu 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 1 describes the CI main menu options Table 3 1 Console Interface Main Menu options Option Description IP Configuration Setup SNMP Configuration System Characteristics Switch Configuration Console Comm Port Configuration Identify Unit Numbers Renumber Stack Units Displays the IP Configuration Setup screen see IP Configuration Setup on page 3 8 This screen allows you to set or modify IP configuration parameters Di
76. that is displayed for a standalone switch without stacking features b Within 20 seconds after displaying the standalone Main Menu screen the console screen refreshes to show the Main Menu screen for the stack configuration Figure 2 16 Although the Main Menu screen for the stack configuration looks similar to the standalone Main Menu screen closer observation reveals that the stack features are included see bolded text in Figure 2 16 on page 2 21 2 20 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch d BayStack 410 24T Main Menu UN IP Configuration Setup SNMP Configuration System Characteristics Switch Configuration Console Comm Port Configuration Display Hardware Units Spanning Tree Configuration TELNET Configuration Software Download Configuration File Display Event Log Reset Reset to Default Settings Logout Nee arrow keys to highlight option press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt to select pug Figure 2 15 Main Menu Standalone Switch Example m BayStack 410 24T Main Menu E IP Configuration Setup SNMP Configuration System Characteristics Switch Configuration Console Comm Port Configuration Identify Unit Numbers Renumber Stack Units Display Hardware Units Spanning Tree Configuration TELNET Configuration Software Download Confiquration File Display Event Log Reset Reset to De
77. the International Organization for Standardization Open Systems Interconnection ISO OSI model The switch IP address and MAC address are not part of proxy report generation The last reporting IGMP group member in each VLAN represents all of the hosts in that VLAN and IGMP group 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch IGMP Snooping Configuration Rules The IGMP snooping feature operates according to specific configuration rules When configuring your switch for IGMP snooping consider the following rules that determine how the configuration reacts in any network topology A port that is configured for port mirroring cannot be configured as a static router port If a MultiLink Trunk member is configured as a static router port all of the MultiLink Trunk members are configured as static router ports Also if a static router port is removed and it is a MultiLink Trunk member all MultiLink Trunk members are removed as static router port members automatically Static router ports must be port members of at least one VLAN If a port is configured as a static router port it is configured as a static router port for all VLANs on that port The IGMP configuration is propagated through all VLANs of that port If a static router port is removed the membership for that port is removed from all VLANs of that port The IGMP snooping feature is not STP dependent The IGMP snooping feature is not rate limiting dep
78. the MIB table can be set to Valid or Ignore If the row status is set to Ignore the fields appear to be set when viewed from the console terminal however no traps will be sent to that address until the row status is set to Valid When a Trap IP Address is entered from the console the row status is always set to Valid 3 14 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface System Characteristics The System Characteristics screen Figure 3 5 allows you to view system characteristics and contains three user configurable fields sysContact sysName and sysLocation Choose System Characteristics or press s from the main menu to open the System Characteristics screen System Characteristics Size Of Stack Base Unit MAC Address Reset Count Operation Mode Stack Unit 4 2 4 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 51 Last Reset Typ Power Status sysDescr sysObjectID sysUpTime sysServices sysContact sysName sysLocation Local MDA Type Enter text press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt when complete Power Cycl Primary Power 4 port 10Base T 100Base TX with Autosense 400 4TX MDA BayStack 410 24T HW Revx FW Vx xx SW vx x x xx ISVN x 1 3 6 1 4 1 45 3 35 1 00 06 26 3 Mario Lento Publications Building 12 Floor 20 lt Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main y Figure 3 5 System Characteristics Screen Table 3 4 describes the
79. to reset a specific unit in the stack or the entire stack When you select this option the switch resets runs a self test then displays the Nortel Networks logo screen Press Cirl Y to access the BayStack 410 24T main menu Resets the switch to the factory default configuration settings This option is Settings followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action Enter Yes to reset the switch to the factory default configuration settings enter No to abort the option Ifthe switch is participating in a stack configuration additional prompts allow you to choose to reset a specific unit in the stack or the entire stack When you select this option the switch resets runs a self test then displays the Nortel Networks logo screen Press Ctrl Y to access the BayStack 410 24T main menu continued 3 6 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 1 Using the Console Interface Console Interface Main Menu options continued Option Description Logout D D D D eee a Caution If you choose the Reset to Default Settings option all of your configured settings will be replaced with factory default settings when you press Enter Achtung Bei Auswahl des Befehls zur R cksetzung auf die Standardeinstellungen werden alle von Ihnen konfigurierten Einstellungen durch die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen ersetzt wenn Sie die Eingabetaste dr cken Attention Si vous restaurez la configuration usine votre configuration cou
80. 0 Allowed Source MAC Address Allowed Source MAC Address MAC Address Security Table Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Allowed Source MAC Address Allowed Source MAC Address Screen 16 Press Ctrl P to display previous screen Enter MAC Address xx xx Xx xx xx xx press Return or Enter when complete Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 14 MAC Address Security Table Screens 16 Screens Screen 16 Choose MAC Address Security Table or press t from the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu to display the MAC Address Security Table screen 309985 B Rev 00 3 35 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Note The following screen shows an example of typical user input in boldface type MAC Address Security Table UN Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 MAC Address Allowed Source MAC Address Allowed Source 44 33 22 44 55 44 S1 SS 22 44 33 55 66 55 S2 o o e LI I 22 55 33 44 33 22 S3 d cu d om 44 22 33 55 44 22 SA D E T 22 33 44 55 33 44 S3 IG Screen 1 More Press Ctrl N to display next screen Enter MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX press Return or Enter when complete d Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu P Figure 3 15 MAC Address Security Table Screen Table 3 11 descr
81. 0 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned MAC Address Security Configuration page 3 24 MAC Address Security Disabled MAC Address Security SNMP_Locked Disabled Partition Port on Intrusion Disabled Partition Time 1 second DA Filtering on Intrusion Disabled Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion Disabled Clear by Ports NONE Learn by Ports NONE Current Learning Mode Disabled MAC Address Security Port Configuration page 3 28 Security Disabled MAC Address Security Port Lists page 3 31 Port List Blank field continued E 2 309985 B Rev 00 Default Settings Table E 1 Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch continued Appears in this CI screen Field Default setting MAC Address Security Table page 3 35 Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned MAC Address no MAC address assigned Allowed Source Blank field VLAN Configuration page 3 40 Create VLAN 1 Delete VLAN blank field VLAN Name VLAN VLAN number Management VLAN Yes VLAN Type Port Based Protocol Id PID None User defined PID 0x0000 VLAN State Inactive Port Membership U all ports assigned as untagged members of VLAN 1 VLAN Port Configuration page 3 46 Unit 1 Port 1 Filter Tagged Frames No Filter Untagged Frames No Filter Unregistered Frames N
82. 0 printable characters continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 103 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 37 Software Download Screen Fields continued Field Description TFTP Server IP The IP address of your TFTP load host nadress Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point Start TFTP Load Specifies whether to start the download of the switch software image default is No of New Image Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes Press Enter to initiate the software download process Note The software download process can take up to 60 seconds to complete or more if the load host path is congested or there is a high volume of network traffic To ensure that the download process is not interrupted do not power down the switch for approximately 10 minutes Default Value No Range Yes No LED Indications During the Download Process The software download process automatically completes without user intervention The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image Be careful not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion the process could take up to 10 minutes for completion depending on network conditions Note If problems occur during the software download process the Software Download screen displays
83. 00 baud with eight data bits one stop bit and no parity as the communications format with flow control set to Xon Xoff Uplink Expansion Slot The Uplink Expansion slot allows you to attach optional media dependent adapters MDAs that support a range of media types see Appendix B Media Dependent Adapters for more information about MDA types available from Nortel Networks 10BASE T Port Connectors The BayStack 410 24T switch uses IOBASE T 8 pin modular port connectors AII BayStack 410 24T switches are shipped with port connectors configured as MDI X media dependent interface crossover These ports connect over straight cables to the network interface controller NIC card in a node or server similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub If you are connecting to another Ethernet hub or Ethernet switch you need a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the attached device see MDI and MDI X Devices on page D 2 The switch ports also support half and full duplex mode operation see also Connecting IOBASE T Ports and 10 100 MDA Ports on page 2 8 The switch uses RJ 45 port connectors to connect to 10BASE T Ethernet segments or nodes Note 10BASE T 100BASE TX MDA ports optional must use Category 5 UTP cable to accommodate the 1OOBASE TX functionality See Appendix D Connectors and Pin Assignments for more information about the RJ 45 port connectors 309985 B Rev
84. 15 With network segmentation each switch port connects to a segment that is a single broadcast domain When a switch port is configured to be a member of a VLAN it is added to a group of ports workgroup that belong to one broadcast domain The BayStack 410 24T switch allows you to assign ports to VLANs using the console TELNET or any generic SNMP based network management software You can assign different ports and therefore the devices attached to these ports to different broadcast domains This feature allows network flexibility because you can reassign VLANs to accommodate network moves additions and changes eliminating the need to change physical cabling VLAN 1 VLAN 2 BayStack 410 24T RAIS Switch us Desras sE OF FOF Figure 1 15 Port Based VLAN Example BS41014A 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch IEEE 802 1Q Tagging BayStack 410 24T switches operate in accordance with the IEEE 802 1Q tagging rules Important terms used with the 802 1Q tagging feature are VLAN identifier VID the 12 bit portion of the VLAN tag in the frame header that identifies an explicit VLAN Port VLAN identifier PVID a classification mechanism that associates a port with a specific VLAN see Figures 1 17 to 1 20 Tagged frame the 32 bit field VLAN tag in the frame header that identifies the fra
85. 17 logout password protected 3 117 Lost Packets field 3 79 MAC address location 1 20 stack MAC address 1 20 when configuring the BootP server 1 20 309985 B Rev 00 MAC Address field 3 16 MAC Address Table option 3 19 MAC Address Table screen 3 20 MAC address based network security 1 15 configuring 3 22 Main Menu illustration 2 18 2 21 main menu console interface 3 4 Management Information Base MIB 1 9 Maximum Age Time field 3 97 MDI X to MDI cable connections D 3 MDI X to MDI X cable connections D 4 media adapter B 5 MIB See Management Information Base Multicasts field 3 79 MultiLink Trunk Configuration option 3 19 MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen 3 57 MultiLink Trunking configuration example 1 61 configuration rules 1 73 description 1 18 Multiple Collisions field 3 81 N network configuration configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub 1 25 network interface card NIC connecting to 2 8 network management 1 20 network protocol standards compatibility A 2 Network security 1 13 O options Clear All Port Statistics 3 20 Console Comm Port Configuration 3 5 Display Event Log 3 6 Display Port Statistics 3 20 Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings 3 92 Index 3 IP Configuration 3 5 Logout 3 7 MAC Address Table 3 19 MultiLink Trunk Configuration 3 19 Port Configuration 3 19 Port Mirroring Configuration 3 19 Rate Limiting Configuration 3
86. 19 Reset 3 5 Reset to Default Settings 3 6 SNMP Configuration 3 5 Software Download 3 6 Spanning Tree Configuration 3 6 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 3 92 Switch Configuration 3 5 System Characteristics 3 5 TELNET Configuration 3 6 VLAN Configuration 3 19 Oversized Packets field 3 80 P package contents 2 1 Packets field 3 79 Participation field 3 95 password prompt screen 3 117 Path Cost field 3 95 port cables connecting 2 8 Port Configuration option 3 19 Port Configuration screen 3 52 port connections troubleshooting 4 6 Port field 3 53 3 79 3 94 Port Mirroring address based 1 83 configuration rules 1 86 coversation steering 1 19 description 1 19 monitoring modes 3 67 Nortel Networks StackProbe 1 19 port based 1 81 Port Mirroring Configuration option 3 19 Port Mirroring Configuration screen 3 64 port priority 1 37 Port Statistics screen 3 78 Index 4 port status LEDs 2 14 Port VLAN Identifier PVID 1 37 ports connecting the console port 2 10 IEEE 802 3u compliant autonegotiation 1 10 modes 1 10 power cords 1 7 Power LED 2 14 power connecting 2 12 power on self tests 2 14 power up sequence 4 5 Priority field 3 95 product support xxviii publications related xxvii publications Nortel Networks xxviii R rack standard installing in 2 5 RADIUS based network security 1 15 configuring 3 82 Rate limiting 1 9 broadcast and multicast storm
87. 2 99 44 00 and the Stack software offset 1s 1F then the Stack MAC address becomes 00 00 82 99 44 1F If another unit in the stack is assigned as the base unit the MAC address of the new base unit with offset now applies to the stack configuration The original stack IP address still applies to the new base unit For an example of a BootP configuration file see Appendix F Sample BootP Configuration File 1 20 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch SNMP MIB Support The BayStack 410 24T switch supports an SNMP agent with industry standard MIBs as well as private MIB extensions which ensures compatibility with existing network management tools The BayStack 410 24T switch supports the MIB II RFC 1213 the Bridge MIB RFC 1493 and the RMON MIB RFC 1757 which provide access to detailed management statistics For a complete listing of supported MIBs see Features on page 1 9 For details on SNMP trap support see SNMP Trap Support following this section SNMP Trap Support Table 1 3 The BayStack 410 24T switch supports an SNMP agent with industry standard SNMPvI1 traps as well as private SNMPv1 trap extensions Table 1 3 Supported SNMP Traps Trap Name Configurable Sent when RFC 1215 Industry Standard linkUp Per port A port s link state changes to up linkDown Per port A port s link state changes to down authenticationFailure System wide There is an SN
88. 255 255 any address is allowed Software Download page 3 102 Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Start TFTP Load of New Image Zero length string 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned No Configuration File page 3 106 Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Copy Configuration Image to Server Retrieve Configuration Image from Server Zero length string 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned No No 309985 B Rev 00 E 7 Appendix F Sample BootP Configuration File This appendix provides a sample BootP configuration file The BootP server searches for this file called bootptab or BOOTPTAB TXT depending on your operating system which contains the site specific information including IP addresses needed to perform the software download and configuration You can modify this sample BootP configuration file or create one of your own A sample BootP configuration file follows The following is a s from a Bay Networks BootP daemons can us Before using your sw configuration file w Blank lines and line Legend first field ample of a BootP configuration file that was extracted EZ LAN network management application Note that other e a configuration file with a different format itch BootP facility you must customize your BootP ith the appropriate data S beginning with are ignored hostname Fields are separated required to indicate
89. 410 24T I Both ports are tagged I members of VLAN 1 I and VLAN 2 i I 2 Kuss cic Figure 1 24 VLANs Spanning Multiple 802 1Q Tagged Switches 309985 B Rev 00 1 41 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Because there is only one link between the two switches the Spanning Tree Protocol STP treats this configuration as any other switch to switch connection For this configuration to work properly both switches must support the 802 1Q tagging protocol VLANs Spanning Multiple Untagged Switches Figure 1 22 shows VLANs spanning multiple untagged switches In this configuration switch S2 does not support 802 1Q tagging and a single switch port on each switch must be used for each VLAN For this configuration to work properly spanning tree participation must be set to Disabled because the STP is not supported across multiple LANs VLAN 1 VLAN 2 s L BayStack 410 24T Untagged ports Untagged ports Non 802 1Q tagging switch BS41021A Figure 1 22 VLANs Spanning Multiple Untagged Switches When the STP is enabled on t
90. 5 255 255 255 2554255 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice od Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Mut Figure 3 42 TELNET Configuration Screen Table 3 36 describes the TELNET Configuration screen fields 309985 B Rev 00 3 99 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 36 TELNET Configuration Screen Fields Field Description TELNET Access Allows remote access to the CI through a TELNET session Login Timeout Login Retries Inactivity Timeout Event Logging Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled Specifies the amount of time you have to enter the correct password at the console terminal prompt Default Value 1 minute Range 0 to 10 minutes 0 indicates no timeout Specifies the number of times you can enter an incorrect password at the console terminal prompt before the session is terminated Default Value 3 Range 1 to 100 Specifies the amount of time the session can be inactive before it is terminated Default Value 15 minutes Range 0 to 60 minutes 0 indicates no timeout Specifies the types of events that will be displayed in the Event Log screen see Display Event Log on page 3 109 Default Value All Range All None Accesses Failures Description All Logs the following TELNET events to the Event Log screen TELNET connect Indicates the IP address and acc
91. AN specified in the screen s VLAN field and also for any other VLAN where this port is a member See also Configuring Ports as Static Router Ports following this table Default Value Range LX Configuring Ports as Static Router Ports If you specify a port as a Static Router Port in the IGMP Configuration screen that port will receive all the IP Multicast related information such as Host Membership Report Host Membership Query and IP Multicast UDP data This feature is provided for certain legacy routers that are unable to periodically generate a Host Membership Query If you configure a port as a static router port the IP Multicast traffic can still be forwarded to any dynamically detected IGMP routers 309985 B Rev 00 3 75 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch If you are absolutely sure that it is required for your particular legacy router configure only the ports that are towards the legacy router as the static router ports This action will avoid misconfigurations which can prevent you from receiving IGMP multicast traffic Note In most cases configuring ports as Static Router Ports is not necessary and can prevent you from receiving IGMP multicast traffic You should configure a static router port only if you are certain that it is required for your particular router Most routers will be dynamically detected as IGMP routers in which case no configuration is required Multicast Group Memb
92. B 9 Console Comm Port Connector ssssessssneee D 5 xix Tables Table 1 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions susssssss 1 4 Table 1 2 International Power Cord Specifications sess 1 7 Table 1 3 SU POR SNMP WAS Looscieprtke epoca auc d aod de DL E epo bob 1 21 Table 2 1 ml mare ye qe em 2 14 Table 3 1 Console Interface Main Menu options sseseeeeeneee 3 5 Table 3 2 IP Configuration Setup Screen Fields sss 3 9 Table 3 3 SNMP Configuration Screen Fields esee 3 13 Table 3 4 System Characteristics Screen Fields sssssssss 3 16 Table 3 5 Switch Configuration Menu Screen Options sssssssss 3 19 Table 3 6 MAC Address Table Screen Fields sssssssseess 3 21 Table 3 7 MAC Address Security Configuration Menu Options 3 24 Table 3 8 MAC Address Security Configuration Screen Fields 3 26 Table 3 9 MAC Address Security Port Configuration Screen Fields 3 30 Table 3 10 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screen Fields sussse 3 32 Table 3 11 MAC Address Security Table Screen Fields ssssuss 3 37 Table 3 12 VLAN Configuration Menu Screen Options sss 3 39 Table 3 13 VLA
93. Current Maximum Thermal Output 100 W maximum 150 VA maximum 1 5 to 0 6A 100 VAC 500 BTU hr 309985 B Rev 00 A 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Physical Dimensions Parameter Height Width Depth Weight Specifications 7 03 cm 2 77 in 44 20 cm 17 40 in 34 29 cm 13 50 in 3 46 kg 7 63 Ib Performance Specifications Parameter Specifications Frame Forward Rate 64 byte packets Port Forwarding Filtering Performance 64 byte packets Address Database Size Addressing Frame Length Up to 1 million packets per second pps maximum learned unicast traffic For fixed 10BASE T ports 14 880 pps maximum For 100BASE T MDA ports 148 810 pps maximum 16 000 entries at line rate 32 000 entries without flooding 48 bit MAC address 64 to 1518 bytes IEEE 802 1Q Untagged 64 to 1522 bytes IEEE 802 1Q Tagged Network Protocol and Standards Compatibility IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 3 10BASE T ISO IEC 8802 3 Clause 14 e IEEE 802 3u 100BASE FX ISO IEC 8802 3 Clause 26 e IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX ISO IEC 8802 3 Clause 25 IEEE 802 3x Full Duplex operation IEEE 802 3z Gigabit plus Flow Control 309985 B Rev 00 Data Rate e Technical Specifications 10 Mb s Manchester encoded or 100 Mb s 4B 5B encoded for 100BASE T MDA Interface Options e 10BASE T RJ 45 8 pin modular connectors for MDI
94. D I None VLAN Name VLAN 1 User Defined PID 0x0000 Management VLAN Yes VLAN State Active Port Membership 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 28 Unit 41 UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUU Unit 42 UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU Unit 3 UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU Unit 44 UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU UUUUUU KEY T Tagged Port Member U Untagged Port Member Not a Member of VLAN Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice eid Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main age Figure 3 17 VLAN Configuration Screen Table 3 13 describes the VLAN Configuration screen fields Table 3 13 VLAN Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Create VLAN Allows you to set up or view configured VLAN workgroups Enter the number of the new VLAN you want to create or view then press Enter The Port Membership fields indicate the corresponding VLAN workgroup configuration if configured or all dashes indicating no VLAN Members configured Alternatively you can use the space bar to toggle through the various configured VLAN workgroups You can create up to 64 different VLANs including VLAN 1 Default 1 Range 2 to 4094 continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 41 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 13 VLAN Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Delete VLAN VLAN Name Management VLAN VLAN Type Protocol Id
95. Describes how to connect up to eight BayStack 410 24T switches into a stack configuration by installing optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Modules Reference for the BayStack 350 410 450 Management Software Operations Part number 201245 A Describes how to use the Nortel Networks Device Manager software a set of graphical network management applications you can use to configure and manage the BayStack 350 410 450 switches 309985 B Rev 00 xxvii Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to support baynetworks com library tpubs Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Using Adobe Acrobat Reader you can open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers You can download Acrobat Reader free from the Adobe Systems Web site www adobe com You can purchase selected documentation sets CDs and technical publications through the collateral catalog The catalog is located on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com catalog html and is divided into sections arranged alphabetically e The CD ROMs section lists available CDs e The Guides Books section lists books on technical topics e The Technical Manuals section lists available printed documentation sets
96. Disabled Proxy Allows the switch to consolidate IGMP Host Membership Reports received on its Robust Value Query Time downstream ports and to generate a consolidated proxy report for forwarding to its upstream neighbor This field affects all VLANs for example if you disable Proxy for the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field Proxy is disabled for ALL VLANs You cannot set the Proxy field value to Disabled unless the Snooping field value is Enabled Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled Allows you to set the switch to offset expected packet loss on a subnet If packet losses on a subnet are unacceptably high the Robust Value field can be increased to a higher value This field affects only the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field for example if you change the robust value on the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field other VLANS are not affected Default Value 2 Range 1 to 64 Allows you to control the number of IGMP messages allowed on the subnet by varying the Query Interval the Query Interval is the interval between general queries sent by the IP multicast router This field affects only the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field for example if you change the Query Time value field on the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field other VLANs are not affected Default Value 125 seconds Range 1 to 512 seconds continued 3 74 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface
97. During this time the switch initiates a self test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress The results of the self test are displayed briefly 5 or 10 seconds in the Self Test screen Figure 3 49 which is followed by the Nortel Networks logo screen Figure 3 50 Note The Self Test screen remains displayed only if the self test detects a fatal error BayStack 410 24T Self Test CPU RAM test Pass ASIC addressing test Pass ASIC buffer RAM test Pass ASIC buffer stack init test Pass Port internal loopback test Pass Cascade SRAM test Pass Fan test wee Bass Self test complete e J Figure 3 49 Self Test Screen After Resetting the Switch Note The Self Test screen for a switch that is participating in a stack configuration includes an additional test cascade SRAM test 3 112 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Ne KKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Nortel Networks Copyright x All Rights Reserved BayStack 410 24T Versions ck ck ck ck 0k ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk Ck ck ck Sk Ck Ck ck ck kk ck ck kk ck ck ck ok kk ck ck Sk Sk Sk Sk kx A ko ko ko ES c 1996 2000 HW Revx FW Vx xx SW vx Xx X x ISVN x Enter Ctrl Y to begin Figure 3 50 Nortel Networks Logo Scre
98. EE REV JED ew TIN POT VASE A LTO AOL MoT RAW There are two 1OOBASE FX models Figure B 2 Figure B 2 400 2FX MDA The 400 2FX MDA uses two longwave 1300 nm SC connectors to attach devices over 62 5 125 micron multimode fiber optic cable 400 4FX MDA The 400 4FX MDA uses four longwave 1300 nm MT RJ connectors to attach devices over 62 5 125 micron multimode fiber optic cable 100BASE FX Deje lere i m Li mF aac a TX RX TA RE 400 2FX MDA BS41047A 100BASE FX MDA Front Panels B 4 309985 B Rev 00 Media Dependent Adapters Both models conform to the IEEE 802 3u 100BASE FX standard and can be used to attach fiber based 100 Mb s connections to other compatible Fast Ethernet devices Single mode fiber cable is not supported Table B 2 describes the I00BASE FX components and LEDs For installation instructions see Installing an MDA on page B 6 Table B 2 100BASE FX MDA Components Item Label Description 1 Link Communications link LEDs green On Valid communications link established Off The communications link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Blinking The corresponding port is management disabled 2 F Dx Full duplex port status LEDs green On The corresponding port is in full duplex mode Off The corresponding port is in hal
99. Green On The switch is connected to the upstream unit s Cascade A In connector Yellow On The Cascade A Out connector CAS Up for this switch is looped internally wrapped to the secondary ring Yellow Blinking Incompatible software revision or unable to obtain a unit or ID Renumber Stack Unit table full The unit is on the ring Green but cannot participate in the stack configuration CAS Dwn Stack mode Off The switch is in standalone mode Green On The switch is connected to the downstream unit s Cascade A Out connector Yellow On The Cascade A In connector CAS Dwn for this switch is looped internally wrapped to the secondary ring Yellow Blinking Incompatible software revision or unable to obtain a unit or ID Renumber Stack Unit table full The unit is on the ring Green but cannot participate in the stack configuration Base Base mode Green On The switch is configured as the stack base unit Off The switch is not configured as the stack base unit or is in standalone mode Blinking Stack configuration error Indicates that multiple base units or no base units are configured in the stack Yellow On This unit is operating as the stack configuration s temporary base unit This condition occurs automatically if the base unit directly downstream from this unit fails If this happens the following events take place The two units directly upstream and directly downstream from the failed unit automatically wrap their cascade connec
100. MDA aeui evicn aaepe Ret e id na b rennin sateen B 2 Eee dno rcm B 3 LUN UPAR e A B 6 Replacing an MDA with a Different Modal eene neta npn nunca B 7 Appendix C Quick Steps to Features ev EDI eA TA VLAN H S C 2 COPING ILI TONKS eritees criss rinia duds dec da tnu Ead Duc accede p C 5 COPTIC Port ed et cae i aceteeted niche awed C 6 Gomiguring PT NU ve agi ances labs detects rra d Pad Pic da DR aci cuf o iind C 8 xii 309985 B Rev 00 Appendix D Connectors and Pin Assignments RJ 45 40BASE T 100BASE TX Port Connectors MDI and MDI X DIES ao iiccuissacraccsacusacmdacsiaboueceiaacuicneniuisias La Di so po FE CO Ec LUUD POP ia D 2 hEEXIoO MEN Cable Cannes ecce ta cic onem e Eo Sese a Ode ocu con taco o erue ondes D 3 MDI X to MDI X Cable Connections sessi D 4 DB 9 iRS 232 D Console Comm Port Connector ucro rrr tiat eso bise cs D 5 Appendix E Default Settings Appendix F Sample BootP Configuration File Index 309985 B Rev 00 xiii Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 1 15 Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 1 23 Figure 1 24 Figure 1 25 Figure 1 26 Figure 1 27 Figure 1 28 Figure 1 29 309985 B Rev 00 Figures Ba Stack d TO SAT SON uuiussteukesoca
101. MP Static Router Ports Key gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41057A Figure C 9 Configuring IGMP Snooping 3 of 3 C 10 309985 B Rev 00 Appendix D Connectors and Pin Assignments This appendix describes the BayStack 410 24T switch port connectors and pin assignments RJ 45 10BASE T 100BASE TX Port Connectors The RJ 45 port connectors Figure D 1 are wired as MDI X ports to connect end stations without using crossover cables See MDI and MDI X Devices on page D 2 for information about MDI X ports For IOBASE T connections use Category 3 or higher UTP cable When using IOBASE T 100BASE TX MDAs use only Category 5 UTP cable 616EA Figure D 1 RJ 45 8 Pin Modular Port Connector 309985 B Rev 00 D 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table D 1 lists the RJ 45 8 pin modular port connector pin assignments Table D 1 RJ 45 Port Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Description 1 RX Receive Data 2 RX Receive Data 3 TX Transmit Data 4 Not applicable Not applicable 5 Not applicable Not applicable 6 TX Transmit Data 7 Not applicable Not applicable 8 Not applicable Not applicable MDI and MDI X Devices Media dependent interface MDI is the IEEE standard for the interface to unshielded twisted pair UTP cable For two devices to communicate the transmitter of one device must connect to the receiver of t
102. MP authentication failure coldStart Always on The system is powered on warmStart Always on The system restarts due to a management reset s5Cir MIB Nortel Networks Proprietary Traps s5CtrUnitUp s5CtrUnitDown s5CtrHotSwap s5CtrProblem Always on A unit is added to an operational stack Always on A unit is removed from an operational stack Always on A unit is hot swapped in an operational stack Always on An assigned base unit fails 309985 B Rev 00 1 21 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Network Configuration You can use BayStack 410 24T switches to connect workstations personal computers PCs and servers to each other by connecting these devices directly to the switch through a shared media hub that is connected to the switch or by creating a virtual LAN VLAN through the switch This section provides four network configuration examples using BayStack 410 24T switches e Desktop switch application e Segment switch application e High density switched workgroup application e Fail safe stack application Desktop Switch Application Figure 1 6 shows the BayStack 410 24T switch used as a desktop switch where desktop workstations are connected directly to switch ports This configuration uses the optional 400 4TX MDA 10BASE T 100BASE TX and provides dedicated 100 Mb s connections to the network center to the server and for two users Twenty four users are provided with dedicated 10 Mb s conne
103. N Configuration Screen Fields sseessssssese 3 41 Table 3 14 Predefined Protocol Identifier PID eeeeesssssssssss 3 44 Vaile dE Reserven FIDE asocia dri PpCA tK rPED REF RRROREFRFPEO EF HF DD THER FH FP MURUS 3 45 Table 3 16 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Fields eesseessss 3 47 Table 3 17 VLAN Display by Port Screen Fields seseesesseesese 3 50 Table 3 18 Traffic Class Configuration Screen Fields sss 3 51 Table 3 19 Port Configuration Screen Fields sssseseesssseeeeee 3 53 Table 3 20 High Speed Flow Control Configuration Screen Fields 3 55 Table 3 21 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu Screen Options 3 58 Table 3 22 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen Fields ssssssss 3 60 Table 3 23 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen Fields sssessssss 3 63 Table 3 24 Port Mirroring Configuration Screen Fields sess 3 65 Tag 325 Monitoring Mod s iuuccccsodmenccceiuece n tuucece tieu rA 3 67 309985 B Rev 00 xxi Table 3 26 Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Fields seseeeesssss 3 70 Table 3 27 IGMP Configuration Menu Screen Options ssseesssss 3 71 Table 3 28 IGMP Configuration Screen Fields
104. PACKS sokoine bnda RI EE H Hb Hb 1 57 Por Fans innit CEG Tec 1 58 Default Traffic Class Configuration Screen Example 1 58 Selling Parr Priority Example rie er tup sna dat Receta 1 60 Switch to Switch Trunk Configuration Example ssss 1 61 Switch to Server Trunk Configuration Example sssss 1 62 Client Server Configuration Example sess 1 63 Choosing the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen 1 64 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S1 1 65 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S2 1 67 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S3 1 69 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S4 1 71 Loss of Distributed Trunk Members erinnerte tatnen uiid 1 75 Path Cost Arbittation Example 1 actore anria 1 76 Example 1 Correctly Configured Trunk sss 1 77 Example 2 Detecting a Misconfigured Port ssesssss 1 78 Port Based Mirroring Configuration Example esses 1 81 Port Mirroring Port Based Screen Example sss 1 83 Address Based Mirroring Configuration Example 1 84 Port Mirroring Address Based Screen Example
105. PID Allows you to delete a specified VLAN except the assigned management VLAN see Management VLAN field Enter the number of the VLAN you want to delete then press Enter or use the space bar to toggle through the selection until you reach the specific VLAN you want to delete then press Enter The specified VLAN is deleted as soon as you press Enter The software does not prompt you to reconsider this action If you delete a VLAN all configuration parameters that are associated with that VLAN are deleted also You cannot delete VLAN 1 By default all switch ports are assigned as untagged members of VLAN 1 with all ports configured as PVID 1 See IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Workgroups on page 1 36 for more information Default blank field Range 2 to 4094 Allows you to assign a name field to configured VLANs Default VLAN VLAN number Range Any ASCII string of up to 16 printable characters Allows you to assign any VLAN as the management VLAN VLAN 1 is the default management VLAN for the switch To set this field the VLAN State field value must be Active and the VLAN Type field value must be Port Based or Protocol Based with the Protocol Id PID Field value set to IpEther2 Default Yes Range Yes No Allows you to select the type of VLAN port based or protocol based to create To set this field the VLAN State field value must be Inactive Default Port Based Range Port Based Protocol Based Allows you to set the pr
106. Port Configuration on page 3 28 This screen allows you to specify the MAC addresses that are allowed to access the switch Return to Switch Exits the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu screen and displays the Configuration Menu Switch Configuration Menu screen MAC Address Security Configuration The MAC Address Security Configuration screen Figure 3 9 allows you to Enable or Disable the MAC Address Security feature and to specify the appropriate system response to any unauthorized network access to your switch Choose MAC Address Security Configuration or press c from the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu to display the MAC Address Security Configuration screen 3 24 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface MAC Address Security MAC Address Security SNMP Locked Partition Port on Intrusion DA Filtering on Intrusion Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion MAC Security Table Clear by Ports Learn by Ports Current Learning Mode Disabled Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice a MAC Address Security Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled ES ind Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main d Figure 3 9 MAC Address Security Configuration Screen Table 3 8 describes the MAC Address Security Configuration screen fields 309985 B Rev 00 3 25 Using t
107. Priority 4 Low Priority 5 Low Priority 6 Low Priority 7 Low Changing the priorities of the traffic classes will cause an automatic Reset to Current Settings to occur across the entire stack The current configuration will be adapted to the new set of priorities Are you sure you want to change priorities to the new settings No Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 20 Traffic Class Configuration Screen Table 3 18 describes the Traffic Class Configuration screen fields Table 3 18 Traffic Class Configuration Screen Fields Field Description User Priority Column header for the read only fields that indicate the user priority values from priority O to priority 7 These values are derived from the three bit field in the header of 802 1Q tagged frames see IEEE 802 1Q Tagging on page 1 37 Traffic Class Column header for the eight user configurable fields that correspond to the adjacent user priority levels Default Low Range Low High 309985 B Rev 00 3 51 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Port Configuration The Port Configuration screen Figure 3 21 and Figure 3 22 allows you to configure specific switch ports or all switch ports You can enable or disable the port status of specified switch ports set optional MDA ports to autonegoti
108. Software Download Error Codes Table 4 3 describes error codes that are associated with the software download process The error codes appear only on the console screen of the switch that is connected to your TFTP load host during the software download process If an error code appears during the download process perform the appropriate corrective action provided in Table 4 3 If the suggested corrective action does not resolve the problem contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center see How to Get Help in the Preface section of this guide Table 4 3 Software Download Error Codes Error code Description Corrective action 2001 Download process failed to transmit Check the stack cable connections then repeat packet to other stack units the software download process 2002 TFTP load host failed to respond to ARP Verify that your TFTP load host is operational request and check that the connectivity between the switch stack and the TFTP load host is valid 2003 Received image failed CRC check Verify that the switch software image is valid not corrupted and repeat the software download process 2004 The download process has lost Verify that your TFTP load host is operational synchronization with the TFTP load then repeat the software download process host 2005 TFTP timeout The software download Verify that your TFTP load host is operational has timed out due to network congestion then repeat the software download pr
109. Software Release V3 0 0 Part No 309985 B Rev 00 June 2000 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 2000 Nortel Networks All rights reserved Printed in the USA June 2000 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks Corporation Bay Networks and Optivity are registered trademarks and Accelar BayStack EZ LAN Optivity Campus Optivity Enterprise StackProbe and the Bay Networks logo are trademarks of Nortel Networks NA Inc Microsoft MS MS DOS Win32 Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks NA Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks NA Inc does not assume any liability that may oc
110. System Characteristics screen fields 309985 B Rev 00 3 15 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 4 System Characteristics Screen Fields Field Description Operation Mode Size of Stack Base Unit MAC Address Reset Count Last Reset Type Power Status Local MDA Type sysDescr Read only field that indicates the operation mode of the unit for example When the unit is part of a stack configuration the read only field indicates the unit is operational in a stack and lists the current unit number of this switch In this example see Figure 3 5 on page 3 15 the current unit number is Unit 2 When the unit is not part of a stack configuration operating standalone the read only field indicates the unit is operating as a switch When in this operation mode the Size of Stack and Base Unit fields see following description do not appear This read only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration This field indicates the number of units configured in the stack configuration 1 to 8 units maximum This read only field only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration This field indicates the unit number of the switch that is currently operating as the base unit The MAC address of the BayStack 410 24T switch or when the switch is participating in a stack configuration the MAC address of the stack configuration A read on
111. T 10BASE T Switch Configuring Port Mirroring To create or modify port mirroring ports follow the flowcharts in Figures C 5 and C 6 Choose Port Mirroring Configuration or press i from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the Port Mirroring Configuration screen Port Mirroring Configuration screen Is Monitoring Mode Set Monitoring Mode field field set Is Monitor Port field set Set Monitor Port field see Port Mirroring Configuration Rules Monitor Port Set for port based mode No gt Are Ports X and Y fields configured No Configure Ports X and Y fields see Port Mirroring Configuration Rules oO y gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41053A Figure C 5 Configuring Port Mirroring 1 of 2 C 6 309985 B Rev 00 Quick Steps to Features Are Address A and B Configure Addresses configured Enable Port Mirroring Port Mirroring see Port Mirroring Configuration Enabled Rules Key Don gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41054A Figure C 6 Configuring Port Mirroring 2 of 2 309985 B Rev 00 C 7 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Configuring IGMP Snooping To create or modify IGMP Snooping ports follow the flowcharts in Figures C 7 to C 9 Choose IGMP Configuration or press g from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to o
112. T2 T3 T4 and T5 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Clients accessing data from the servers FS1 and FS2 are provided with maximized bandwidth through trunks T1 T2 T3 T4 and T5 Trunk members the ports making up each trunk do not have to be consecutive switch ports they can be selected randomly as shown by T5 With spanning tree enabled one of the trunks T2 or T3 acts as a redundant backup trunk to switch S2 With spanning tree disabled trunks T2 and T3 must be configured into separate VLANS for this configuration to function properly see IEEE 802 10 VLAN Workgroups on page 1 36 FS1 FS2 S4 mmm Pro eas ohne ot o BS41033A Figure 1 40 Client Server Configuration Example The trunk configuration screens for switches S1 to S4 are shown in Trunk Configuration Screen Examples following this section For detailed information about configuring trunks see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 309985 B Rev 00 1 63 Using the BaySta
113. Table 3 28 IGMP Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Set Router Ports Static Router Ports Selects the IGMP version according to the IGMPv1 Version 1 or IGMPv2 Version 2 standard see RFC 2236 Use this field in conjunction with the Static Router Ports field see next field description to select the IGMP version to set You can also use this field to view which static router ports are set to Version 1 or to Version 2 Use the space bar to toggle between the two versions and view the static router ports settings This field affects all VLANs for example if you change the value of the Set Router Ports field on the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field ALL VLANs are affected Default Value Version 1 Range Version 1 Version 2 Allows you to assign switch ports to receive all IP multicast related traffic When the unit is part of a stack configuration the screen displays the unit numbers of the switches configured in the stack along with the corresponding ports The configured ports do not filter any IP multicast traffic The Static Router Ports fields are displayed in six port groups for example 1 6 7 12 13 18 The number of ports displayed depends on the switch model or type of optional MDA that is installed in the Uplink Module slot This field affects all VLANs for example if you assign a port as a static router port in this screen the port becomes a static router port for the VL
114. Table B 2 TOOBASE FX MDA ComponeniS soisissa iaiia B 5 Table D 1 RJ 45 Port Connector Pin Assignments seesesseeeee D 2 Table D 2 DB 9 Console Comm Port Connector Pin Assignments D 5 Table E 1 Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch E 1 309985 B Rev 00 Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the BayStack 410 24T 1OBASE T Switch part of the Nortel Networks BayStack Switch line of communications products This guide describes the features uses and installation procedures for the BayStack 410 24T IOBASE T Switch also referred to in this guide as the BayStack 410 24T switch or the switch BayStack 410 24T switches include a dedicated Uplink Module slot for attaching optional media dependent adapters MDAs that support a range of media types Installation instructions are included with each MDA see your Nortel Networks sales representative for ordering information For more information about the MDAs refer to Appendix B Media Dependent Adapters BayStack 410 24T switches provide Fail Safe stackability when you install the optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module Installation instructions are included with each BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module see your Nortel Networks sales representative for ordering information For more information about the BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module see Stack Operation on page 1 27
115. The switch initiates a self test during which the port LEDs display various patterns to indicate the progress of the self test 3 Upon successful completion of the self test within 10 seconds after power is applied the Status LED turns on 4 Theremaining port LEDs indicate their operational status as described in Table 4 2 Corrective Actions Symptom Probable cause Corrective action All LEDs are off The switch is not receiving AC Verify that the AC power cord is fastened securely power at both ends and that power is available at the AC power outlet The fans are not operating or Verify that there is sufficient space for adequate the airflow is blocked causing airflow on both sides of the switch the unit to overheat continued 309985 B Rev 00 4 5 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 4 2 Corrective Actions continued Symptom Probable cause Corrective action The Activity LED for a connected port is off or does not blink and you have reason to believe that traffic is present The Status LED is off The Status LED is blinking The switch is experiencing a port connection problem The switch s link partner is not autonegotiating properly A fatal error was detected by the self test A nonfatal error occurred during the self test Note Operating temperature for the switch must not exceed 40 C 104 F Do not place the switch in areas where it can
116. Tree Configuration screen The screen s Trunk field lists the active trunks adjacent to the port numbers that correspond to the specific trunk member for that trunk When a trunk is active you can disable spanning tree participation using the Trunk Configuration screen or using the Spanning Tree Configuration screen When a trunk is not active the spanning tree participation setting in the Trunk Configuration screen does not take effect until the Trunk Status field is set to Enabled The trunk is also viewed by management stations as a single spanning tree port The spanning tree port is represented by the trunk member with the lowest port number For example if ports 13 14 15 and 16 are trunk members of trunk T1 the management station views trunk T1 as spanning tree port 13 For more information about using the MultiLink Trunking feature see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 See also Appendix C Quick Steps to Features for configuration flowcharts that can help you use this feature 309985 B Rev 00 1 79 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Port Mirroring Conversation Steering You can designate one of your switch ports to monitor traffic on any two specified switch ports port based or to monitor traffic to or from any two specified addresses that the switch has learned address based Note A probe device such as the Nortel Networks StackProbe or equivalent must be connected to the des
117. Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Predefined Protocol Identifier PID Description Table 3 14 defines the standard protocol based VLANS and PID types that are supported by the BayStack 410 24T switch Table 3 14 Predefined Protocol Identifier PID PID Name Encapsulation PID Value hex VLAN Type Ip Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 0800 0806 Standard IP on Ethernet Type 2 frames Ipx 802 3 Ethernet 802 2 FF FF Novell IPX on Ethernet 802 3 frames Ipx 802 2 Ethernet 802 2 EO EO Novell IPX on Ethernet 802 2 frames Ipx Snap Ethernet Snap 8137 8138 Novell IPX on Ethernet SNAP frames Ipx Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 8137 8138 Novell IPX on Ethernet Type 2 frames ApITk Ether2Snap Ethernet Type 2 or 809B 80F3 AppleTalk on Ethernet Type 2 and Ethernet Ethernet Snap Snap frames Declat Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 6004 DEC LAT protocol DecOther Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 6000 6003 Other DEC protocols 6005 6009 8038 Sna 802 2 Ethernet 802 2 04 04 IBM SNA on IEEE 802 2 frames Sna Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 80D5 IBM SNA on Ethernet Type 2 frames NetBios 802 2 Ethernet Type 2 FO FO NetBIOS Protocol Xns Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 0600 0807 Xerox XNS Vines Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 OBAD Banyan VINES Ipv6 Ether2 Ethernet Type 2 86DD IP version 6 User Defined Ethernet Type 2 User defined User defined protocol based VLAN see Ethernet 802 2 or 16 bit value User Defined Protocol Identifier PID Ethernet Snap Description on page 3 45 Rarp Ether2 Eth
118. VLAN 1 PVID 1 VLAN 2 PVID 2 VLAN 3 PVID 3 BS41024A Figure 1 25 VLAN Broadcast Domains Within the Switch The broadcast domain for each of the VLANs shown in Figure 1 25 is created by configuring VLAN port memberships for each VLAN and then configuring each of the ports with the appropriate PVID VLAN association e Ports 8 6 and 11 are untagged members of VLAN 1 The PVID VLAN association for ports 6 and 11 is PVID 1 e Ports 2 4 10 and 8 are untagged members of VLAN 2 The PVID VLAN association for ports 2 4 and 10 is PVID 2 e Ports 2 4 10 8 6 and 11 are untagged members of VLAN 3 The PVID VLAN association for port 8 is PVID 3 The following steps show how to use the VLAN configuration screens to configure the VLAN 3 broadcast domain shown in Figure 1 25 309985 B Rev 00 1 45 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch To configure the VLAN port membership for VLAN 1 1 Select Switch Configuration from the BayStack 410 24T switch Main Menu or press w 2 From the Switch Configuration Menu select VLAN Configuration or press v 3 From the VLAN Configuration Menu select VLAN Configuration or press v The default VLAN Configuration screen opens Figure 1 26 a Unit 1 Create VLAN Delete VLAN VLAN Name Management VLAN VLAN Configuration I VLAN Type i Port Based Protocol Id PID None VLAN 1 U
119. WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE iv 309985 B Rev 00 Licensee is responsible for the security of its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs 4 Limitation of liability IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF NORTEL NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO NORTEL NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1
120. a safe place If you forget the new passwords you cannot access the console interface In that case contact Nortel Networks for help Achtung Wenn Sie die f r das System standardmaBig eingestellten PaBw rter andern notieren Sie sich die neuen PaBw rter und bewahren Sie sie an einem sicheren Ort auf Falls Sie die neuen PaBworter vergessen k nnen Sie nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an Nortel Networks um Unterst tzung zu erhalten continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 85 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Attention Si vous changez les mots de passe par d faut du syst me assurez vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans un endroit s r Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe vous ne pourrez plus acc der votre interface Le cas ch ant veuillez contacter Nortel Networks Precauci n Si modifica las contrase as predeterminadas asignadas por el sistema aseg rese de anotar las nuevas contrase as y gu rdelas en un lugar seguro Si olvida las nuevas contrase as no podr acceder al interfaz de la consola En ese caso p ngase en contacto con Nortel Networks para obtener ayuda al respecto Attenzione In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e d
121. aits 3 46 VLAN Digpld DV POE cuuetdssmsotht tr edeben n DUM eiidU ubt ratore Iun En CU SEE Obr TRUE 3 49 Tame itt Xen 3 50 FOI ou E BOE osse onde dep ta aO REDE Dvd A ea tnu os Ouen 3 52 High Speed Flow Control Configuration 5 ennt rtis te tenda renean a 3 54 Choosing a High Speed Flow Control Mode csscceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesenes 3 56 Hali Tunk Config IRAUBEU ai cscs cession cai gd arb ER aa UR edad Mant hat nea Kaka 3 57 MURILINK Tunk Configuration OGORGOI sssrinin 3 59 Multilink Funk Utilization SESH Lees epo a n reo E Y Ra Prec arces 3 61 lx coo Tua NS RE 3 64 acude ireES ep ric M 3 68 GMP TS TST sinnini a Feci acd 3 71 KNP Cori ON assecescirstbtpedu dent rpnidi a 3 72 Multicast Group Membership 3 rrr rto pecie tr iaa OR P E aaa 3 76 PR UI e E A Ek oU ME clesia Gnd afecte teddies upra E 3 78 Console Comm Tort Config Ur aliol seozccio e eeu qoae tne Exerci te Manes tino ucd tele dentate 3 82 Renumbor taek UNIS aniisi NR A 3 89 Hardware Unit Information sessssrireiissiieeniasiieriiiinieriiindia EEE T E 3 91 Spanning Tee Contout ahon erc 3 91 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 1s iisen ia 3 93 Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings esessseesseseeeen 3 96 TELNET Silat icc tile 3 xm imitate RH eee Tere rr ect Tre te er a RP rre aa and E Herr Ras QR 3 99 Samare DOI UN OO DD 3 102 ni d c A 3 106 Doper Evan LOD ocaecat aano dun cp OR eboagc d sente e
122. anged SA CRC DA Key NZ By default All ports are assigned PVID 1 All ports are untagged members of VLAN 1 BS41015A Figure 1 16 Default VLAN Settings When configuring VLANs you configure the switch ports as tagged or untagged members of specific VLANs see Figures 1 17 to 1 20 1 38 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch In Figure 1 17 untagged incoming packets are assigned directly to VLAN 2 PVID 2 Port 5 is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2 and port 7 is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2 PVID 2 Port 1 Port2 Port 3 Tagged member Bw of VLAN 2 Untagged packet CRC Data SA DA gt 5 802 1Q Switch 5 a a Before Porte Port7 Port 8 Untagged member of VLAN 2 BS41016A Figure 1 17 Port Based VLAN Assignment As shown in Figure 1 18 the untagged packet is marked tagged as it leaves the switch through port 5 which is configured as a tagged member of VLAN 2 The untagged packet remains unchanged as it leaves the switch through port 7 which is configured as an untagged member of VLAN 2 PVID 2 of VLAN 2 Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Pd Tagged member 802 1Q Switch Port 4 CRC Data Tag Porte Port7 Port8 C A Untagged member Port 5
123. anieieiacaamiabiniacancers 1 3 LED DEARI PANEI siusis nm 1 4 Back Fano MOTO SS LEUTE 1 6 BO Powell Rece madi csi voa ddr b eee de e ir dated RAN aad id 1 7 RP UO SION oisi buscas ood tut ava XERVEL dx MUU Iac bond ut oaa a Drs Gra d UE 1 8 Cascade Module OBI sudeste e ac d aei E Aa 1 8 Bat REP PRINS quiate rode bee nep DR Ro aat i etl E ctn i Hac eb aad 1 8 gu Re repo ee rer T 1 9 Virtual Local Area Networks VLIMS ccccisctcccccsntts acosapiscaststiletensitinntncadeaedeendeentin ote um 1 12 Gr TAI po MIENNE NN DU T 1 13 RADIUS Based Network Security 2ceoriidost eei ndet ortu ade Feri gasto NOIRE E Pe uua E termes 1 15 MAG Addrass Based Securily crt re rre gn FR ex eH ER REPRE 1 15 zi 2 03 v er rM TUE 1 16 309985 B Rev 00 vii Ib PUNY POSSE i ead n dini aa a aaa EDO Ee ca dss cea Clu aa nd 1 16 Configuration and Switch MatadVemmett eaae oic ente ent attee eie rtt ee cei ng eaters 1 16 Fissn RT So oiu tubo aad Radio Ars x aea AUI Na GR RR o sb af E 1 17 DNIGH DIAS TTC cssc pex iubeo de ree epa dole as ee reser TOM reer reer ORE ret 1 17 Goniguialon PaESIBIBER icto bui ebd bab Hoi abate fud aer Lobo EL Mb aes 1 17 Autosensing and AOtOnedo OT Luisa ucreencecdkit aqaa tedaricczuau dubeg eaa deua taa nan Ed 1 18 SFR AU pe eR stad a o 1 18 d f0 ew ex gkc cem 1 19 POTEVI DE asus dtudndt Paca EU toeX RR Cretae tU I GERE erncere rece reer er ere etree Y uno oe reer PR 1 19 BootP Automatic IP Configuration MAC Address
124. assword settings for the switch and stack operation Only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration When selected this option identifies the unit numbering of each unit in a stack configuration by lighting the corresponding number of Link LEDs for approximately 10 seconds For example in a four unit stack unit 1 displays one Link LED unit 2 displays two Link LEDs unit 3 displays three Link LEDs and unit 4 displays four Link LEDs The LED display temporarily overrides any existing Link LED indications on all unit LED display panels Only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration Displays the Renumber Stack Units screen see Renumber Stack Units on page 3 89 This screen allows you to renumber the units at any time continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 5 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 1 Console Interface Main Menu options continued Option Description Display Hardware Units Spanning Tree Configuration TELNET Configuration Software Download Configuration File Display Event Log Reset Reset to Default Displays the Hardware Unit Information screen see Hardware Unit Information on page 3 91 This screen lists the switch models including any installed MDA and Cascade modules that are configured in your standalone or stack configuration Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu see Spanning Tree Con
125. ate for the highest available speed of the connected station and you can set the duplex mode for specific ports autonegotiation is not supported on fiber optic ports You can disable switch ports that are trunk members however the screen prompts for verification of the request before completing the action Choosing Yes disables the port and removes it from the trunk Note The Autonegotiation fields the Link Trap the Speed fields and the Duplex fields are independent of MultiLink trunking rate limiting VLANs IGMP Snooping and the STP Choose Port Configuration or press p from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the Port Configuration screen Port Configuration b Unit 1 Port Trunk Status Link LnkTrap Autonegotiation Speed Duplex 1 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Half 2 Enabled Up On Enabled 10Mbs Full 3 Enabled Up Off Disabled 10Mbs Full 4 Enabled Up Off Disabled 100Mbs Half 5 Enabled Down On Disabled 100Mbs Half 6 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Ful 7 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Full 8 Enabled Down Off Disabled 100Mbs Half 9 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Full 10 Enabled Down On Disabled 100Mbs Half 11 Enabled Up Off Disabled 10Mbs Half 12 Enabled Up Off Disabled 10Mbs Half 13 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Fu 14 Enabled Up On Enabled 100Mbs Ful More Press Ctrl N to display choices for additional ports
126. ation Menu screen options 3 18 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 5 Switch Configuration Menu Screen Options Option Description MAC Address Table Displays the MAC Address Table screen see MAC Address Table on MAC Address Based Security VLAN Configuration Port Configuration High Speed Flow Control Configuration MultiLink Trunk Configuration Port Mirroring Configuration Rate Limiting Configuration page 3 20 This screen allows you to view all MAC addresses and their associated port or trunk that the switch has learned or to search for a particular MAC address to see if the switch has learned the address Displays the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu see MAC Address Based Security on page 3 22 This menu provides the following options MAC Address Security Configuration MAC Address Security Port Configuration MAC Address Security Port Lists MAC Address Security Table and Return to Switch Configuration Menu screen This menu allows you to set up your MAC address based security for your switch Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu see VLAN Configuration Menu on page 3 38 This menu provides the following options VLAN Configuration VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Display by Port Traffic Class Configuration and Return to Switch Configuration Menu screen This menu allows you to create and modify VLANs Displays the Port Confi
127. ation as described in the following sections proceed to Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface for detailed descriptions of the menus and screens you can use to customize your configuration Standalone Switch Setup For the initial setup of a standalone switch you need to enter the IP address of the switch the subnet mask and the gateway address refer to Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface for more information about configuring your BayStack 410 24T switch To set the IP address subnet mask and gateway address for the switch 1 Apply power to the switch 2 After the Nortel Networks logo screen appears press Ctrl Y The Main Menu is displayed Figure 2 13 The Main Menu hierarchy is described in Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface 309985 B Rev 00 2 17 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch a BayStack 410 24T Main Menu N IP Configuration Setup SNMP Configuration System Characteristics Switch Configuration Console Comm Port Configuration Display Hardware Units Spanning Tree Configuration TELNET Configuration Software Download Configuration File Display Event Log Reset Reset to Default Settings Logout Use arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option Figure 2 13 Main Menu 3 Select IP Configuration Setup or press i from the Main Menu This selection displays the IP Configuration Setup s
128. atted as a tagged packet the traffic class assigned to the frame is carried forward to the next 802 1p capable switch This allows the packet to carry the assigned traffic class priority through the network until it reaches its destination The following steps show how to use the Traffic Class Configuration screen to configure the port priority level shown in the example Figure 1 34 For more information about using the Traffic Class Configuration screen see VLAN Configuration on page 3 40 1 58 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch To configure the port priority level follow these steps 1 Determine the priority level you want to assign to the switch port User priority levels are assigned default settings in all BayStack 410 24T switches The range is from 0 to 7 The traffic class table can be modified therefore view the settings shown in the Traffic Class Configuration screen before setting the port priority in the VLAN Port Configuration screen 2 Select Switch Configuration from the BayStack 410 24T switch Main Menu or press w 3 From the Switch Configuration Menu select VLAN Configuration or press v 4 From the VLAN Configuration Menu select Traffic Class Configuration or press t The Traffic Class Configuration screen opens Figure 1 36 User Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Traffic Class Configuration
129. ble Figure D 3 BayStack 410 24T switch Switch or hub 1 8 8 1 8 1 8 fo 1 104 fo 1 104 o 2 2044 I o 2 2074 I O 3 30 o 3 305 o4 40 o4 40 o5 50 o5 50 r o 6 60 I o 6 604 o7 70 o7 70 o8 Lee o8 C3 MDI X port Crossover cable MDI X port BS41060A Figure D 3 MDI X to MDI X Cable Connections D 4 309985 B Rev 00 Connectors and Pin Assignments DB 9 RS 232 D Console Comm Port Connector The DB 9 Console Comm Port connector Figure D 4 is configured as a data communications equipment DCE connector The DSR and CTS signal outputs are always asserted the CD DTR RTS and RI signal inputs are not used This configuration enables a management station a PC or console terminal to connect directly to the switch using a straight through cable 1 A e uu e 6 619EA Figure D 4 DB 9 Console Comm Port Connector Table D 2 lists the DB 9 Console Comm Port connector pin assignments Table D 2 DB 9 Console Comm Port Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Description 1 CD Carrier detect not used 2 TXD Transmit data output 3 RXD Receive data input 4 DTR Data terminal ready not used 5 GND Signal ground 6 DSR Data set ready output always asserted 7 RTS Request to send not used 8 CTS Clear to send output always asserted 9 RI Ring indicator not used Shell Chassis ground 309985 B Rev 00 D 5 Appendix E Default
130. by step procedures to correct the problems 309985 B Rev 00 4 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Interpreting the LEDs Figure 4 1 shows the LED display panel used with the BayStack 410 24T switch Table 4 1 describes the LEDs 1 Cas 4 m Pwr Up E PF Status Dwn 2 RPSU Base PF BayStack 410 24T Switch 8 G3 fe Bei fe Biel dc 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 Em EH EN EH EN NN EN Gm Link Em EE EM EM EN NN NH EH Activity 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 E EM EM EE EH E Link Em EM EM EM EM NN EN NND Activity ew Dual color LED BayStack 410 24T BS41003A Figure 4 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Display Panel Table 4 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions Label Type Color State Meaning Pwr Power status Green On DC power is available to the switch s internal circuitry Off No AC power to switch or power supply failed Status System status Green On Self test passed successfully and switch is operational Blinking A nonfatal error occurred during the self test Off The switch failed the self test RPSU RPSU status Green On The switch is connected to the HRPSU and can receive power if needed Off The switch is not connected to the HRPSU or HRPSU is not supplying power CAS Up Stack mode Off The switch is in standalone mode continued 309985 B Rev 00 Troubleshooting Table 4 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions continued Label Type Color State Meaning
131. c redundancy check carrier sense multiple access collision detection clear to send data communications equipment data set ready data terminal equipment Entity Coordination Management filtering database identifier high power redundant power supply unit Internet Gateway Management Protocol Internet Protocol International Organization for Standardization light emitting diode media access control media access unit media dependent adapter medium dependent interface medium dependent interface crossover Management Information Base MultiLink Trunk network interface controller network management station xxvi 309985 B Rev 00 Preface PID Protocol Identifier PPP Point to Point Protocol PVID port VLAN identifier RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RMON remote monitoring RPSU redundant power supply unit SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol STA Spanning Tree Algorithm STP Spanning Tree Protocol TELNET Network Virtual Terminal Protocol TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol UTP unshielded twisted pair VID VLAN identifier VLAN virtual local area network Related Publications For more information about using the BayStack 410 24T switch refer to the following publications Installing Media Dependent Adapters MDA s Part number 302403 B Describes how to install optional media dependent adapters to your BayStack 410 24T switch Installing the BayStack 400 STI Cascade Module Part number 304433 A
132. can be stacked to provide a total of 224 ports when all MDA slots are configured with the maximum port availability Installation instructions are provided with each BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module see Installing the BayStack 400 STI Cascade Module See your Nortel Networks sales representative for ordering information Cooling Fans The variable speed cooling fans not shown are located on one side of the switch to provide cooling for the internal components When you install the switch be sure to allow enough space on both sides of the switch for adequate air flow 309985 B Rev 00 Features Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch BayStack 410 24T switches offer the following features High speed forwarding rate Up to 1 million packets per second peak Store and forward switch Full performance forwarding at full line speed utilizing a 1 28 Gigabit second switch fabric Learning rate 1 million addresses per second peak Address database size 16 000 entries at line rate 32 000 entries without flooding Fail safe stacking Provides uninterrupted connectivity for up to eight units with up to 224 ports stacked together as one managed unit requires one optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module kit per stacked unit See your Nortel Networks sales representative for ordering information Spanning Tree Protocol STP Complies with IEEE 802 1D standard STP can be disabled on the entire switch or stack or on a per
133. ck 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Trunk Configuration Screen Examples This section shows examples of the MultiLink Trunk configuration screens for the client server configuration example shown in Figure 1 40 on page 1 63 The screens show how you could set up the trunk configuration screens for switches 1 to S4 See Spanning Tree Considerations for MultiLink Trunks on page 1 76 and MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 for more information Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S1 Switch S1 is set up with five trunk configurations T1 T2 T3 T4 and TS Setting up the Trunk Configuration for S1 To set up the trunk configuration choose MultiLink Trunk Configuration or press t from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen Figure 1 41 UN MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu MultiLink Trunk Configuration MultiLink Trunk Utilization Return to Switch Configuration Menu Use arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option sed Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Bapt Figure 1 41 Choosing the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen 1 64 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch The MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen opens Figure 1 42 di N MultiLink Trunk Configuration Trunk Trunk Members Unit Port STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Status 1 15 J 17 719 7 21
134. ck to the specified station and prevents unauthorized access to the switch should someone attempt to connect a personal laptop PC into the wall jack The printer is assigned as a single station and is allowed full bandwidth on that switch port It is assumed that all PCs are password protected and that the classrooms and offices are physically secured Library The wall jacks in the library are set up so that the PCs can be connected to any wall jack in the room This allows the PCs to be moved anywhere in the room The exception is the printer which is assigned as a single station with full bandwidth to that port It is assumed that all PCs are password protected and that access to the library is physically secured 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch RADIUS Based Network Security The RADIUS based security feature allows you to set up network access control using the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Services security protocol The RADIUS based security feature uses the RADIUS protocol to authenticate local console and TELNET logins You will need to set up specific user accounts user names and passwords and Service Type attributes on your RADIUS server before the authentication process can be initiated To provide each user with appropriate levels of access to the switch set the following username attributes on your RADIUS server e Read write access Set the Service Type field value
135. code ftus t d Doa tuta aad as Qo dua 1 1 Bayotack 400 247 Switch Front Panel 1 etate rutru nea 1 2 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Display Panel sesessss 1 4 BayStack 410 24T Switch Back Panel esses 1 6 BayStack 410 24T Switch Security Feature sssusssssss 1 13 BayStack 410 24T Switch Used as a Desktop Switch 1 23 BayStack 410 24T Switch Used as a workgroup Switch 1 24 Configuring Power Workgroups and a Shared Media Hub 1 25 Fallo SIAK EXPO 253 Lada adips diosa ae ula sri do Du 1 26 BayStack 400 ST1 Front Panel Components uses 1 27 Connecting Cascade Cables cce erede ada d parvi dd d das 1 28 Stack Up Configuration Example 5a eritd est etr iaeto t eU Ra ted daa i epex gum 1 32 Slack Down Configuration Exemple aei tece arce tee pn tn enint eaenn 1 33 Redundant Cascade Stacking Feature sssssssssss 1 35 Fort Based VLAN Example ac csacmiinecieneunaamiance aia 1 36 Defaut VLAN Sable bbc bela s RR PP acd d be C Ead d 1 38 Port Based VLAN Assignment ssssssssssseeeeeeenen 1 39 802 1Q Tagging After Port Based VLAN Assignment 1 39 802 16 Tag PSION oriri eU EH tet De Proc Ec DERE Abe du car DUE 1 40 802 1Q Tagging After 802 1Q Tag Assignment 1 40 VLANs Spanning Multiple 802 1Q Tagged Switc
136. creen Figure 2 14 Note The default management VLAN IP interface for the BayStack 410 24T switch is VLAN 1 However you can specify which VLAN you want to be the management VLAN see VLAN Configuration on page 3 40 Note IP addresses are written as four decimal numbers for example 123 123 123 123 Each decimal number represents an 8 bit octet When strung together the four octets form the 32 bit Internet address This is called dotted decimal notation The largest possible value of a field in a dotted decimal number is 255 which represents an octet of all ones 2 18 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch T IP Configuration Setup UN BootP Request Mode BootP Disabled Configurable In Use Last BootP In Band Stack IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Switch IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Q OSD IQ T 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP Address to Ping 0 0 0 0 Start Ping No Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice as Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Hae Figure 2 14 IP Configuration Setup Screen Standalone Switch 4 Enter the IP address of the switch in the In Band IP Address field then press Return Note When the IP address is entered in the In Band IP Address field and the In Band Subnet Mask field is not present the softwa
137. creen and Spanning Tree Configuration screen Default Value blank field Range 1 to 8 or 1 to 28 depending on model type continued 3 60 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 22 Using the Console Interface MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Status Trunk Name The STP Learning column contains a single field for each row that when enabled allows the specified trunk to participate in the spanning tree This setting overrides those of the individual trunk members Fast is the same as Normal except that the state transition timer is shortened to two seconds Default Value Normal Range Normal Fast Disabled The Trunk Mode column contains a single read only field for each row that indicates the default operating mode for the switch Basic Basic mode is the default mode for the switch When in this mode source MAC addresses are dynamically assigned to specific trunk members for flooding and forwarding This allows the switch to stabilize and distribute the data streams of source addresses across the trunk members The Trunk Status column contains a single field for each row that allows users to enable or disable any of the trunks Default Value Disabled Range Enabled Disabled The Trunk Name column contains a single optional field in each row that can be used to assign names to the corresponding configured trunks The names chosen for this
138. ctions 1 22 309985 B Rev 00 Before 10BASE T hub To Server Up to 22 users Network Center Key 10 Mb s 100 Mb s 200 Mb s 22 users share 10 Mb s 10 22 Mb s per user Server bottleneck 10 Mb s bandwidth Network center bottleneck 10 Mb s bandwidth Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch After BayStack 410 24T switch Up to 24 10 Mb s users 2 additional 100 Mb s users Server To Network Center 24 users with dedicated 10 Mb s bandwidth 2 users with dedicated 100 Mb s bandwidth Server with dedicated 100 Mb s bandwidth Network center with dedicated 100 Mb s full duplex bandwith 200 mb s bidirectional BS41005A Figure 1 6 BayStack 410 24T Switch Used as a Desktop Switch 309985 B Rev 00 1 23 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Segment Switch Application Figure 1 7 shows the BayStack 410 24T switch used as a segment switch to alleviate user contention for bandwidth and eliminate server and network bottlenecks Before segmentation 88 users had a total bandwidth of only 10 Mb s available After segmentation 114 users have 40 Mb s four times the previous bandwidth while adding 22 dedicated 10 Mb s connections This configuration can be extended to add more segments without degrading performance
139. cur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein USA Requirements Only Federal Communications Commission FCC Compliance Notice Radio Frequency Notice Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual it may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case users will be required to take whatever measures may be necessary to correct the interference at their own expense European Requirements Only EN 55 022 Statement This is to certify that the Nortel Networks BayStack 410 24T switch is shielded against the generation of radio interference in accordance with the application of Council Directive 89 336 EEC Article 4a Conformity is declared by the application of EN 55 022 Class A CISPR 22 Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take appropriate measures Achtung Dieses ist ein Ger t der Funkst rgrenzwer
140. d Enter WLEES TRHAHOREILEBEAST The Reset to Default Settings option accessed from the main menu allows you to reset a standalone switch a specific unit in a stack configuration or an entire stack and replace all configured switch parameters with the default values To view default values see Appendix E Default Settings The Reset to Default Settings option takes approximately 5 seconds to complete During this time the switch initiates a self test that comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress 3 114 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface The results of the self test are displayed briefly 5 or 10 seconds in the Self Test screen Figure 3 51 which is followed by the Nortel Networks logo screen Figure 3 52 f N BayStack 410 24T Self Test CPU RAM test Pass ASIC addressing test ees Pass ASIC buffer RAM test Pass ASIC buffer stack init test Pass Port internal loopback test Pass Cascade SRAM test Pass Fan test xe Pass Self test complete Qo Figure 3 51 Self Test Screen After Resetting to Default Settings Note The Self Test screen remains displayed only if the self test detects a fatal error 309985 B Rev 00 3 115 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch i KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK Sk kk Kk SII CK CI kk KI S I CK SI S S KG amp A KG x X ko A
141. d allows this switch to operate as a standalone switch Both IP address fields cannot be configured to use the same IP address 2 22 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Note IP addresses are written as four decimal numbers for example 123 123 123 123 Each decimal number represents an 8 bit octet When strung together the four octets form the 32 bit Internet address This is called dotted decimal notation The largest possible value of a field in a dotted decimal number is 255 which represents an octet of all ones 6 Enter the IP subnet mask address in the In Band Subnet Mask field then press Return 7 Enter the default gateway address in the Default Gateway field then press Return Proceed to Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface for detailed descriptions of the menus and screens you can use to customize your configuration 309985 B Rev 00 2 23 Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface This chapter describes how to configure and manage the BayStack 410 24T switch using the menu driven console interface CI This chapter covers the following topics e Accessing the CI menus and screens e Using the CI menus and screens e Description of options available from the main menu Accessing the CI Menus and Screens You can access the CI menus and screens locally through a console terminal remotely through a dial up modem connection or in band through a TELNET session see Console C
142. data displayed in this column represents data obtained from the last BootP reply received The in band stack IP address field Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point The in band IP address of the BayStack 410 24T switch This field is not required for the operation of the stack This field can not use the same IP address used for the stack Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point Note When the IP address is entered in the In Band IP Address field and the In Band Subnet Mask field value is not present the software provides an in use default value for the In Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the class of the IP address entered in the In Band IP Address field The subnet address mask associated with the in band IP address shown on the screen see Note above Network routers use the subnet mask to determine the network or subnet address portion of a host s IP address The bits in the IP address that contain the network address including the subnet are set to 1 in the address mask and the bits that contain the host identifier are set to 0 Default Value 0 0 0 0 no subnet mask assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a
143. decimal value separated by a decimal point continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 9 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 2 IP Configuration Setup Screen Fields continued Field Description Default Gateway IP Address to Ping Start Ping The IP address of the default gateway Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point The IP address of the station you want to verify using the ping feature Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point Allows you to ping the target IP address entered in the IP Address to Ping field above Default Value No Range No Yes Choosing a BootP Request Mode The BootP Request Mode field in the IP Configuration screen allows you to choose which method the switch uses to broadcast BootP requests e BootP Disabled e BootP or Last Address e BootP When Needed e BootP Always Note Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests the BootP process will time out if a reply is not received within approximately 7 minutes When the process times out the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode To restart the BootP process change the BootP request mode to any of the three following m
144. del terminal de la consola perder la comunicaci n con el interfaz de la consola al pulsar Intro Si se pierde la comunicaci n ajuste el terminal de la consola para que coincida con el nuevo valor del puerto de servicio Attenzione Nel caso in cui si scelga una velocit di trasmissione non corrispondente a quella del terminale della console la comunicazione con l interfaccia della console cadr premendo il tasto Invio Se la comunicazione cade impostare il terminale della console in modo tale che corrisponda alla nuova impostazione della porta di servizio continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 83 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Console Switch Password Type Console Stack Password Type TELNET Switch Password Type IN 2LU I 545 R2TJILOm L HI amp 3 m L HFESIRT Oe Enter fRLT E amp l IY fee Pret Acoma aon OORE Wr LUS EA W REI M mii amp ijEHIELCCOEAD TL a3 Enables password protection for accessing the console interface Cl of a standalone switch through a console terminal If you set this field to Required you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the Cl Thereafter you will need to specify the correct password at the console terminal prompt See Console Read Only Switch Password and Console Read Write Switch Password for more information Default Valu
145. download process When LEDs 18 to 24 are all on the switch has received the new software image successfully Link status LEDs ports 1 to 12 only The LEDs begin to turn on in succession beginning with port 1 which indicates that various sectors of the switch s flash memory are being erased When LEDs 1 to 12 are all on the switch s flash memory has been erased Link status LEDs ports 1 to 8 only The LEDs begin to turn on in succession beginning with port 1 which indicates that the new software image is being programmed into the switch s flash memory When LEDs 1 to 8 are all on the new software image has been programmed successfully into the switch s flash memory After the reset completes the new software image initiates the switch s self test which comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress The results of the self test are displayed briefly in the Self Test screen after which the CI screens appear 309985 B Rev 00 3 105 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Configuration File The Configuration File Download Upload screen Figure 3 44 allows you to store your switch stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server You can retrieve the configuration parameters of a standalone switch or an entire stack and use the retrieved parameters to automatically configure a replacement switch or stack Certain requirements app
146. dress B Zero length string Zero length string Zero length string 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned continued 309985 B Rev 00 Default Settings Table E 1 Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch continued Appears in this CI screen Field Default setting Rate Limiting Configuration page 3 68 Packet Type Both Limit None IGMP Configuration page 3 72 VLAN 1 Snooping Enabled Proxy Enabled Robust Value 2 Query Time Set Router Ports Static Router Ports 125 seconds Version 1 for all ports Multicast Group Membership page 3 76 VLAN 1 Port Statistics page 3 78 Unit Port 1 1 Console Comm Port Console Port Speed 9600 Baud Configuration page 3 82 Console Switch Password Type None Console Stack Password Type None TELNET Switch Password None Type TELNET Stack Password Type None Console Read Only Switch user Password Console Read Write Switch secure Password Console Read Only Stack user Password Console Read Write Stack secure Password Primary RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 RADIUS UDP Port 1645 RADIUS Shared Secret Blank field continued 309985 B Rev 00 E 5 Table E 1 Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch continued Appears in this CI screen Field Default setting Renumber Stack Units page 3 89 Only appears wh
147. ds Eo AREE EUR 3 1 tsinga Te CI Ments and SOOO ETE oO aeii 3 2 Navigating the CI Menus and SORS uices aececaae inr ba dread ns ek dd aka daa 3 2 Screen Fields and Daescnplionb i5 uneceiaceibest iue dan Ferr Isa t a tre ttu db Sed Gear 3 3 Man NEN TET D OLD L ea dali 3 4 I s apo Se uaissiids eter aud dia aa ode uU ual iit a 3 8 Choosing a BootP Reguest MOOR uice niae one metro ruta mien donne D EEE 3 10 Boot Sa p M H 3 11 Poof or Lal AODOSBE o dar cai acess acute im bect dese c bladb tc a Teo ecun ds fepe t AED en dint ler Un dub 3 11 Boot When NEGUET iaces tuiuiseie Em Certain e Ne Papst an Sartre Pec aai 3 12 EODD AINSI ae taihnd a a Suan a Rn aka Go 3 12 SNN CONIMA NOR airnn EE D o S SOT 3 13 SVS I t Ha CUBES osea ERROR ESSE ETA e DESEE OL a abo 3 15 QUOD C OUS oiascecccontdtes nA dk usto dido RE Rebus ka Unda bn dead Gain a Rd 3 18 MSC AGUES FES Mme E 3 20 MAG Addrass Based SECU suae as C e GER HIVE DIR RH R Rab C duds 3 22 MAG Address Security Configuration csssccccscscctecccessnsnssesdacensscetsaaeteseantentennenaacee 3 24 MAC Address Security Port Configuration eeesssesese 3 28 MAC Address Security Port LISTS sissioni ndeiseanna lean kat adan 3 31 MAC Address Security Table Breeze eer inteputdpbes Mee aun 3 35 x 309985 B Rev 00 PR Eee mici MT o EOS 3 38 EE Berger et E 3 40 VLAN Port CoUODFR DE 4 baud Had a rt a i as as ehe ER to NR REPE g
148. dule slot 1 8 considerations 1 33 initial installation 1 29 network example 1 26 overview 1 27 stack MAC address 1 30 stacking considerations 1 31 temporary base unit 1 30 309985 B Rev 00 Start TFTP Load of New Image field 3 104 State field 3 95 Status field 3 54 support Nortel Networks xxviii switch initial setup 2 17 Switch Configuration Menu 3 18 options 3 19 Switch Configuration option 3 5 sysContact field 3 17 sysDescr field 3 16 sysLocation field 3 17 sysName field 3 17 sysObjectID field 3 17 sysServices field 3 17 System Characteristics option 3 5 System Characteristics screen 3 15 sysUpTime field 3 17 T tagged frame 1 37 tagged member 1 37 technical publications xxviii technical specifications A 1 technical support xxviii TELNET event log operational exception 3 110 event log session status 3 110 Logout option 3 117 supported features 1 10 See also TELNET Configuration screen TELNET Access field 3 100 TELNET Configuration option 3 6 TELNET Configuration screen 3 99 Temporary base unit 1 30 text conventions XXV TFTP Server IP Address field 3 104 3 107 TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol Total Octets field 3 79 Index 5 Trap IP Address fields 3 14 traps 1 21 Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP software download 3 102 using to upgrade firmware 1 11 troubleshooting port interface 4 7 power up sequence 4 5 Tutorial IEEE 802 1Q tagg
149. e None Range None Local Password RADIUS Authentication Enables password protection for accessing the console interface Cl of any participating switch in a stack configuration through a console terminal If you set this field to Required you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the Cl of any stack unit Thereafter you will need to specify the correct password at the console terminal prompt when accessing the stack See Console Read Only Stack Password and Console Read Write Stack Password for more information Default Value None Range None Local Password RADIUS Authentication Enables password protection for accessing the console interface Cl of a standalone switch through a TELNET session If you set this field to Required you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the Cl Thereafter you will need to specify the correct password at the console terminal prompt See Console Read Only Switch Password and Console Read Write Switch Password for more information Default Value None Range None Local Password RADIUS Authentication continued 3 84 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description TELNET Stack Enables password protection for accessing the console interface Cl of any Password Type Console Read Only Switch Password Console Read Write Switch Password participating switch in a
150. e Autonegotiation Modes on page 4 7 MultiLink Trunking The MultiLink Trunking feature allows you to group multiple ports up to four together when forming a link to another switch or server thus increasing aggregate throughput of the interconnection between two devices up to 800 Mb s in full duplex mode when an optional 100BASE T MDA is installed BayStack 410 24T switches can be configured with up to six MultiLink Trunks The trunk members can be configured within a single unit in the stack or distributed between any of the units within the stack configuration distributed trunking For more information about the MultiLink Trunking feature see MultiLink Trunks on page 1 61 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch IEEE 802 1Q VLANs BayStack 410 24T switches support up to 64 port based VLANs with IEEE 802 1Q tagging available per port When a switch port is configured to be a member of a VLAN it is added to a group of ports workgroup that belong to one broadcast domain You can assign different ports and therefore the devices attached to these ports to different broadcast domains This feature allows network flexibility because you can reassign VLANs to accommodate network moves additions and changes eliminating the need to change physical cabling For more information about 802 1Q VLANs see IEEE 802 10 VLAN Workgroups on page 1 36 Port Mirroring The port mirroring fea
151. e Unit 0 Port 0 Range Unit 0 to 8 Port 0 to 28 Indicates the path cost from this switch port to the root bridge Default Value 0 Range Not applicable Indicates the Actual Hello Interval the amount of time between transmissions of configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs that the root bridge is currently using Note that all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Hello Interval parameter value See also Bridge Hello Time Default Value 2 seconds Range 1 to 10 seconds Indicates the Maximum Age Time parameter value that the root bridge is currently using This value specifies the maximum age that a Hello message can attain before it is discarded Note that the root bridge s Maximum Age Time parameter value becomes the actual Maximum Age Time parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Bridge Maximum Age Time Default Value 20 seconds Range 6 to 40 seconds continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 97 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 35 Spanning Tree Switch Settings Parameters continued Parameter Description Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Maximum Age Time Bridge Forward Delay Indicates the Forward Delay parameter value that the root bridge is currently using This value specifies the amount of time that the bridge ports remain in the Listening and Learning states before entering the F
152. e VLAN Type Protocol Id or User defined PID field values unless you delete the VLAN If you delete a VLAN all configuration parameters that are associated with that VLAN are deleted also Default Inactive Range Inactive Active Allows you to assign VLAN port memberships to standalone or stacked unit ports The ports can be configured in one or more VLANs To set this field you must Set the VLAN State field value to Active Certain restrictions apply for gigabit ports and when using the BayStack 410 24T switch ports as participants of Protocol based VLANs see Gigabit Ports and BayStack 410 24T Switch Ports Restriction on page 3 46 This field is dependent on the Tagging field value in the VLAN Port Configuration screen see the Tagging field description in Table 3 16 on page 3 47 For example When the Tagging field is set to Untagged Access you can set the Port Membership field as an untagged port member U or as a non VLAN port member When the Tagging field is set to Tagged Trunk you can set the Port Membership field as a tagged port member T or as a non VLAN port member The Port Membership fields are displayed in six port groups for example 1 6 7 12 13 18 The number of ports displayed depends on the switch model or type of optional MDA installed in the Uplink Module slot Default U All ports are assigned as untagged members of VLAN 1 Range U T and 309985 B Rev 00 3 43
153. e participation of any trunk member is changed enabled or disabled the spanning tree participation of all members of that trunk is changed similarly Figure 3 39 and Figure 3 40 show sample port configurations for the two Spanning Tree Port Configuration screens Choose Spanning Tree Port Configuration or press c from the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu to open the Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen N Spanning Tree Port Configuration Unit 1 Port Trunk Participation Priority Path Cost State 1 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 2 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 3 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 4 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 5 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 6 jJ Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding z 1 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 8 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 9 il Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 10 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 11 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 12 Normal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 13 3 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding 14 3 ormal Learning 128 100 Forwarding More Press Ctrl N to display choices for additional ports Use space bar to display choices press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt to select choice m Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main id Figure 3 39 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen 1 of 2 309985 B Rev 00 3 93 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch
154. e unit set the Unit Select switch to Base until the failed unit is repaired or replaced Note If you do not reassign the temporary base unit as the new base unit and the temporary base unit fails the next unit directly downstream from this unit becomes the new temporary base unit This process can continue until there are only two units left in the stack configuration 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Removing a Unit from the Stack If a unit is removed from the stack therefore operating in standalone mode the following switch configuration settings revert back to the settings configured before the unit became a member of the stack e P address e Console password e TELNET password SNMP community strings Stack Configurations As shown in Figure 1 12 the cascade connectors and cables on the 400 ST1 front panel provide the ability to stack up to eight BayStack switches With 400 4TX MDAs installed in each switch the stack can accommodate a maximum of 224 switch ports Because stack parameters are associated with the base unit see Initial Installation on page 1 29 the physical stack order depends on the base unit s position and whether the stack is configured stack up or stack down 309985 B Rev 00 1 31 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Stack Up Configurations In Figure 1 12 data flows from the base unit unit 1 to the next switch which is assigned as uni
155. e write threshold is 20 entries for each event If any event exceeds the write threshold an event entry is displayed in the Event Log screen 3 110 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Figure 3 47 shows an example of the event log entry for this type of event Entry Number 3 sysUpTime 02 29 44 Reset Count 2 The last event exceeded the write threshold Further write attempts by this event are blocked The write threshold will be cleared when the switch is reset or when the Event Log is compressed Figure 3 47 Sample Event Log Entry Exceeding the Write Threshold The write threshold is reset when either of the following occurs e The BayStack 410 24T switch is reset e The firmware determines that compression is required for maintenance of the event log s flash memory Flash Update Figure 3 48 shows an example of the event log entry for this type of event Entry Number 13 sysUpTime 12 20 38 Reset Count 2 Flash configuration update operation write or erase failed Configuration information may be lost Figure 3 48 Sample Event Log Entry Showing Flash Update Status 309985 B Rev 00 3 111 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Reset The Reset option accessed from the main menu allows you to reset a standalone switch a specific unit in a stack configuration or an entire stack without erasing any configured switch parameters Resetting the switch takes approximately 5 seconds
156. ed routers which forward the IP Multicast stream on their local network only if there is a recipient The client server path is set up as follows 1 The designated router sends out a host membership query to the subnet and receives host membership reports from end stations on the subnet 2 The designated routers then set up a path between the IP Multicast stream source and the end stations 3 Periodically the router continues to query end stations on whether to continue participation 4 Aslong as any client continues to participate all clients including nonparticipating end stations on that subnet receive the IP Multicast stream Note Although the nonparticipating end stations can filter the IP Multicast traffic the IP Multicast still exists on the subnet and consumes bandwidth IP Multicast can be optimized in a LAN by using P Multicast filtering switches such as the BayStack 410 24T switch 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch As shown in Figure 1 31 a non IP Multicast filtering switch causes IP Multicast traffic to be sent to all segments on the local subnet Host Membership IGMP Query iic RISE isn i Designated router 1 vas e a Designated router 2 Non multicast filtering switch L TE Multicast stream Nambahi Non multicast Repo
157. ee VLAN Configuration Menu on page 3 38 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch MultiLink Trunks A MultiLink Trunk MLT allows you to group up to four switch ports together to form a link to another switch or server thus increasing aggregate throughput of the interconnection between the devices up to 800 Mb s in full duplex mode with optional 1 OOBASE T F MDAs installed You can configure up to six MultiLink Trunks The MLT members can reside on a single unit or on multiple units within the same stack configuration as a distributed trunk MLT software detects misconfigured or broken trunk links and redirects traffic on the misconfigured or broken trunk link to other trunk members within that MLT You can use the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen to create switch to switch and switch to server MLT links see Figure 1 38 and Figure 1 39 Figure 1 38 shows two trunks T1 and T2 connecting switch S1 to switches S2 and S3 CrYYYYY EI EBL EL BS41031A Fi
158. een 309985 B Rev 00 3 109 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch The Event Log screen provides the following information e Software download Indicates the new software version e Authentication failure Indicates any attempted SNMP get or set access that specified an invalid community string e TELNET session status Indicates various TELNET events For details on configuring this feature see TELNET Configuration on page 3 99 Operational exception Indicates that the microprocessor has received an exception at the specified vector number and dumps stack registers e Excessive bad entries Displays excessive bad entries detected by firmware e Write threshold Displays event entries that exceeded the write threshold e Flash update Displays status of flash updates Excessive Bad Entries If the firmware detects excessive bad entries in the event log s flash memory errors exceeding 75 percent of the memory buffer the event log is cleared all entries are discarded and an event entry is displayed in the Event Log screen Figure 3 46 shows an example of the event log entry for this type of event Entry Number 4 sysUpTime 00 20 53 Reset Count 2 Excessive bad entries in log Event Log cleared Figure 3 46 Sample Event Log Entry Showing Excessive Bad Entries Write Threshold To extend the lifetime of the event log s flash memory a write threshold is set for each event entered in flash memory Th
159. een E Spanning Tree Switch Settings Bridge Priority 8000 Designated Root 80000060FD77A62B Root Port Unit 0 Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 seconds Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Forward Delay 15 seconds Bridge Hello Time 2 seconds Bridge Maximum Age Time 20 seconds Bridge Forward Delay 15 seconds aa Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main a Figure 3 41 Spanning Tree Switch Settings Screen 3 96 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 35 Using the Console Interface Table 3 35 describes the Spanning Tree Switch Settings parameters Spanning Tree Switch Settings Parameters Parameter Description Bridge Priority Designated Root Root Port Root Path Cost Hello Time Maximum Age Time Indicates the management assigned priority value of the bridge ID in hexadecimal notation which is the most significant byte of the bridge ID The STA uses this parameter to determine the root bridge or designated bridge For example the bridge with the lowest bridge ID becomes the root bridge with Bridge Priority values compared first followed by the hardware addresses Default Value 8000 Range 0 to 65535 Indicates the bridge ID of the root bridge as determined by the STA Default Value 8000 bridge_id Range 0 to 65535 Indicates the specific unit in a stack or standalone switch s port number that offers the lowest path cost to the root bridge Default Valu
160. ees Up to 28 users Up to 28 users BS41008A Figure 1 9 Fail Safe Stack Example 1 26 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Stack Operation BayStack 410 24T switches provide fail safe stacking when you install the optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module see Fail Safe Stack Application on page 1 26 You can connect up to eight switches to provide uninterrupted connectivity for up to 224 ports The entire stack is manageable as a single unit Installation instructions are provided with the BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module see your Nortel Networks sales representative for ordering information BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module The front panel components of the BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module are shown in Figure 1 10 Component descriptions follow the figure 1 Blank connectors unused 2 Cascade A Out connector 3 Unit Select switch 4 Cascade A In connector BS41009A Figure 1 10 BayStack 400 ST1 Front Panel Components 309985 B Rev 00 1 27 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Cascade A Out Connector Provides an attachment point for connecting this unit to another unit via the cascade cable A return cable from another unit s Cascade A Out connector to this unit s Cascade A In connector completes the stack connection see the example shown in Figure 1 11 Unit Select Switch The Unit Select switch up Base determines the base unit for t
161. en Note The Nortel Networks logo screen for your switch will display the BayStack 410 24T model number and the current hardware firmware and software versions Upon successful completion of the power up self tests the switch is ready for normal operation To access the BayStack 410 24T main menu press Ctrl Y 309985 B Rev 00 3 113 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Reset to Default Settings 3 Caution If you choose the Reset to Default Settings command all of your configured settings will be replaced with factory default settings when you press Enter Achtung Bei Auswahl des Befehls zur R cksetzung auf die Standardeinstellungen werden alle von Ihnen konfigurierten Einstellungen durch die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen ersetzt wenn Sie die Eingabetaste dr cken Attention Si vous restaurez la configuration usine votre configuration courante sera remplac e par la configuration usine d s que vous appuierez sur Entr e Precauci n Si selecciona el comando Restaurar valores predeterminados todos los valores de configuraci n se sustituir n por las valores predeterminados en f brica al pulsar Intro Attenzione Nel caso in cui si selezioni la reimpostazione dei valori di default tutte le impostazioni configurate verranno sostituite dai default di fabbrica premendo il tasto Invio 0 OFF OF OF b HEB Fa b OPEILV Py OIL KARR THE E ate HL ugani E
162. en the switch is a participant in a stack configuration New Unit Number Renumber units with new setting Current stack order No Spanning Tree Port Configuration page 3 93 Unit Participation Priority Path Cost 1 Normal Learning 128 10 or 100 Spanning Tree Switch Settings page 3 96 Bridge Priority Designated Root Root Port Root Path Cost Hello Time Maximum Age Time Forward Delay Bridge Hello Time Bridge Maximum Age Time Bridge Forward Delay 8000 read only 8000 bridge id read only Unit 0 Port 0 read only 0 read only 2 seconds read only 20 seconds read only 15 seconds read only 2 seconds read only 20 seconds read only 15 seconds read only TELNET Configuration page 3 99 TELNET Access Login Timeout Login Retries Inactivity Timeout Event Logging Allowed Source IP Address 10 user configurable fields Enabled 1 minute 3 15 minutes All First field 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Remaining nine fields 255 255 255 255 any address is allowed continued Table E 1 Default Settings Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch continued Appears in this CI screen Field Default setting Allowed Source Mask 10 user configurable fields For details about this field see Table 3 36 on page 3 101 First field 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Remaining nine fields 255 255
163. en to find an address and enter the address directly from this screen You can enter addresses from either screen but you must return to the Port Mirroring Configuration screen to activate the feature see Port Mirroring Configuration on page 3 64 Choose MAC Address Table or press m from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the MAC Address Table screen 3 20 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Note This screen does not refresh dynamically to show new entries To refresh the screen press Ctrl R to return to the previous menu MAC Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port Mirroring Address A 00 44 55 44 55 22 Port Mirroring Address B 00 33 44 33 22 44 00 60 FX 00 02 30 00 00 AX 85 2X 26 Port 1 00 60 XX 12 02 15 Port 1 00 08 FX 1D 4X 38 Trunk 3 End of Address Table Press Ctrl P to see previous display adi Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main aa Figure 3 7 MAC Address Table Screen Table 3 6 describes the MAC Address Table screen fields Table 3 6 MAC Address Table Screen Fields Field Description Aging Time Specifies how long a learned MAC address remains in the switch s forwarding database If an entry is inactive for a period of time that exceeds the specified aging time the address is removed Default Value 300 seconds Range 10 to 1 000 000 seconds continued
164. endent The snooping field must be enabled for the proxy field to have any valid meaning Static router ports are configured per VLAN and per IGMP Version Note Because IGMP snooping is set up per VLAN all IGMP changes are implemented according to the VLAN configuration for the specified ports For more information about using the IGMP snooping feature see IGMP Configuration Menu on page 3 71 See also Appendix C Quick Steps to Features for configuration flowcharts that can help you use this feature 309985 B Rev 00 IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch You can use the VLAN Configuration screens to prioritize the order in which the switch forwards packets on a per port basis For example if messages from a specific segment are crucial to your operation you can set the switch port connected to that segment to a higher priority level by default all switch ports are set to Low priority Untagged packets received by the switch on that port are tagged according to the priority level you assign to the port see Figure 1 34 Before CRC tal ee Port configuration Data parameters SA Tagged member Port1 Port2 Port 3 x of ULAN 2 Port 5 DA 802 1 Switch High Port 5 wo 5 gt transmit
165. ernet Type 2 8035 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP RARP is a protocol used by some old diskless devices to obtain IP addresses by providing the MAC layer address When you create a VLAN based on RARP you can limit the RARP broadcasts to the ports that lead to the RARP server 3 44 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface User Defined Protocol Identifier PID Description In addition to the standard predefined protocols user defined protocol based VLANs are supported For user defined protocol based VLANs you specify the Protocol Identifier PID for the VLAN Any frames that match the specified PID in any of the following ways are assigned to that user defined VLAN e The ethertype for Ethernet Type 2 frames The PID in Ethernet SNAP frames The DSAP or SSAP value in Ethernet 802 2 frames The following PIDs see Table 3 15 are reserved and are not available for user defined PIDs Table 3 15 Reserved PIDs PID Value hex Comments 04 04 Sna 802 2 FO FO NetBios 802 2 AAAA SNAP 0 05DC Overlaps with 802 3 frame length 0600 0807 Xns Ether2 OBAD Vines Ether2 4242 IEEE 802 1D BPDUs 6000 6009 8038 Dec 0800 0806 Ip Ether2 including Arp 8035 Rarp Ether2 809B 80F3 ApITk Ether2Snap 8100 IEEE 802 1Q for tagged frames 8137 8138 Ipx 80D5 Sna Ether2 86DD Ipv6 Ether2 8808 IEEE 802 3x pause frames 9000 Diagnostic loopback frame 309985 B Rev 00 3 45
166. ership The Multicast Group Membership screen allows you to view configured IP multicast group addresses for specific VLANs The screen displays the IP multicast group addresses associated with ports that are configured within a standalone switch or a stack of switches Note The Multicast Group Membership screen will not display any entries if the Snooping field value is set to Disabled in the IGMP Configuration screen see IGMP Configuration on page 3 72 The displayed addresses are dynamic and can change as clients join or leave the various IP multicast groups You can view changes by refreshing the screen press Ctrl P to refresh the screen Choose Display Multicast Group Membership or press d from the IGMP Configuration Menu screen to open the Multicast Group Membership screen 3 76 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Multicast Group Membership N VLAN 1 Multicast Group Address Port 227 37 32 6 Unit I Port 1 22723743265 Unit 1 Port 1 221 317 32 4 Unit 1 Port 1 2214 3132 3 Unit 1 Port 1 227 37 92 2 Unit 1 Port 1 227 317 321 Unit 1 Port 1 Press Ctrl P to see previous display Press Ctrl N to s more addresses nd Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main iu Figure 3 33 Multicast Group Membership Screen Table 3 29 describes the Multicast Group Membership screen options Table 3 29 Multicast Group Membership Screen Options O
167. ess mode of a TELNET session e TELNET disconnect Indicates the IP address of the remote host and the access mode due to either a logout or inactivity Failed TELNET connection attempts Indicates the IP address of the remote host whose IP address is not on the list of allowed addresses or indicates the IP address of the remote host that did not supply the correct password None Indicates that no TELNET events will be logged in the Event Log screen Accesses Logs only TELNET connect and disconnect events in the Event Log screen Failures Logs only failed TELNET connection attempts in the Event Log screen continued 3 100 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 36 Using the Console Interface TELNET Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Allowed Source IP Address Allowed Source Mask Specifies up to 10 user assigned host IP addresses that are allowed TELNET access to the CI Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point Specifies up to 10 user assigned allowed source address masks The remote IP address is masked with the Allowed Source Mask and if the resulting value equals the Allowed Source IP address the connection is allowed For example a connection would be allowed with the following settings Remote IP address 192 0 1 5 Allowed Source IP Addres
168. etworks Logo Screen iussisse iectse c nemini t rh t n aetas 3 113 Self Test Screen After Resetting to Default Settings 3 115 Nortel Networks Logo Screen After Resetting to Default Settings 3 116 Pasaward Prompt Screen 2i ear a ti a Deu E Ge ds e o 3 117 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Display Panel sess 4 2 400 4TX MDA Front Panal e B 2 100BASE FX MDA Front PANEIS Laus ansaan iaiia B 4 Hoe ate Ree 07 2 nese eater E E E E re e de didi decuit i ee B 6 Configuring eps 10 VEAMS T Of J s br eer tati EE eddie C 2 Contig rng 802 10 VLAMS 2 Of 3 usua eterne EXP nsa ck secuti C 3 Configuimg 80210 VLANS 3 Of SE sscccentsdceckincasctomuricciueticeesdasmiormiones C 4 Gonfiganno Multilink IPII ES siio P eL E a bo bbc C 5 Contouring Port Mirroring TOf 2 seisseto C 6 Configuring Port Mirroring 2 DI SY duce iens tee tergum occi et imet ea panes UR E Rd C 7 Contigarng IGMP Snooping Tof 3 ossa e tenes rta recede cete gi C 8 309985 B Rev 00 Figure C 8 Figure C 9 Figure D 1 Figure D 2 Figure D 3 Figure D 4 309985 B Rev 00 Configuring IGMP Snooping 2 Of 3 1e eiiis end taeda dci C 9 Configuring IGMP Snooping 3 of SY uascieccid teen pae teenie Precor recc inde C 10 RJ 45 8 Pin Modular Port Connector ssssesseeeee D 1 MDI X to MDI Cable Connections ritate tnnt photo irvd aate cue RR aun D 3 MDI X to MDI X Cable Connectiolis oon eerte cene D 4 D
169. evious menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main y Figure 3 26 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen 1 of 2 3 62 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Press Ctrl P to display utilization for trunks 1 4 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice ee Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main d E MultiLink Trunk Utilization C Trunk Traffic Type Unit Port Last 5 Minutes Last 30 Minutes Last Hour 5 Rx and Tx 8 22 45 0 35 0 50 0 8 23 55 0 25 0 70 0 6 Rx and Tx 3 2 65 0 30 0 55 0 Rx and Tx 1 2 45 0 50 0 35 0 Rx and Tx 7 2 25 0 40 0 50 0 Rx and Tx 5 6 75 0 80 0 55 0 Figure 3 27 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen 2 of 2 Table 3 23 describes the MultiLink Trunk Utilization screen fields Table 3 23 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen Fields Field Description Trunk Column header for the read only fields in this screen The read only data displayed in Traffic Type Unit Port this column indicates the trunk 1 to 6 that corresponds to the switch ports specified in the Port field Allows you to choose the traffic type to be monitored for percent of bandwidth utilization see Range Default Value Rx and Tx Range Rx and Tx Rx Tx Lists the trunk member ports that correspond to the trunk specified in the Trunk column The Unit extension to the Port column name only appears when the switch unit is pa
170. f duplex mode 3 Activity Port activity LEDs green Blinking Indicates the network activity level for the corresponding port A high level of network activity can cause LEDs to appear to be on continuously 4 100BASE FX port connectors Model 400 2FX uses SC connectors Model 400 4FX uses MT RJ connectors 309985 B Rev 00 B 5 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Installing an MDA The Uplink Module slot on the BayStack 450 switches accommodates a single MDA The connection can be either a 10 100BASE TX MDA with an RJ 45 connector or a fiber T00BASE FX MDA with an SC or MT RJ connector Note The MDA is not hot swappable Power down the switch before installing or removing an MDA To install an MDA into the Uplink Module slot 1 Unplug the AC power cord from the back of the switch 2 Loosen the thumb screws and remove the filler panel or previously installed MDA from the Uplink Module slot Note If you are replacing an installed MDA with another type of MDA see ee Replacing an MDA with a Different Model on page B 7 3 Insert the MDA into the Uplink Module slot guides Figure B 3 Make sure the MDA slides in on the guides provided Failure to align the guides could result in bent and broken pins BS41048A Figure B 3 Installing an MDA 4 Press the MDA firmly into the Uplink Module slot Be sure that the MDA is fully seated into the mating connector 5 Secure the MDA by ti
171. fault Settings Logout Nise arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option Figure 2 16 Main Menu Stack Configuration Example 309985 B Rev 00 2 21 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch 4 Select IP Configuration Setup or press i from the Main Menu This selection displays the IP Configuration Setup screen Figure 2 17 Note The default management VLAN IP interface for the BayStack 410 24T switch is VLAN 1 However you can specify which VLAN you want to be the management VLAN see VLAN Configuration on page 3 40 IP Configuration Setup UN BootP Request Mode BootP Disabled Configurable In Use Last BootP In Band Stack IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Switch IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 J D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 050 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IP Address to Ping 0 0 0 0 Start Ping No Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu J Figure 2 17 IP Configuration Setup Screen Stack Configuration 5 Enter the Stack IP address in the In Band Stack IP Address field then press Return The n Band Switch IP Address field directly below the In Band Stack IP Address field is not required for the operation of the stack The In Band Switch IP Address fiel
172. figuration on page 3 91 This menu provides the following options Spanning Tree Port Configuration Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings Displays the TELNET Configuration screen see TELNET Configuration on page 3 99 This screen allows you to set your switch to enable a user ata remote console terminal to communicate with the BayStack 410 24T switch as if the console terminal were directly connected to it You can have up to four active TELNET sessions running at one time in either a standalone switch or a stack configuration Displays the Software Download screen see Software Download on page 3 102 This screen allows you to revise the BayStack 410 24T switch software image that is located in nonvolatile flash memory Displays the Configuration File Download Upload screen see Configuration File on page 3 106 This screen allows you to store your switch stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server You can retrieve the configuration parameters for automatically configuring a replacement switch or stack with the same configuration when required Displays the Event Log screen see Display Event Log on page 3 109 Resets the switch with the current configuration settings This option is followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action Enter Yes to reset the switch enter No to abort the option If the switch is participating in a stack configuration additional prompts allow you to choose
173. figuration High Speed Flow Control VLAN Configuration Configuration NES Identify Unit Numbers Renumber Stack Units Display Hardware Units VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Display by Port Traffic Class Configuration MultiLink Trunk Configuration Port Mirroring Configuration Rate Limiting Configuration Spanning Tree Configuration IGMP Configuration u TELNET Configuration Display Port Statistics MultiLink Trunk Configuration Software Download Clear Port Statistics MultiLink Trunk Utilization Configuration File Display Event Log IGMP Configuration Spanning Tree Display Multicast Group Membershi Reset Port Configuration xs ad n P Reset to Default Settings Display Spanning Tree Logout Switch Settings 1 Only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration Only appears when a gigabit MDA is installed in one or more units in a stack configuration BS41045C Figure 3 1 Map of Console Interface Screens The CI screens for your specific switch model will show the correct model name in the main menu screen title and the correct number of ports and port types in the Port Configuration screen Note The field values shown in the CI screens in this section are provided as examples only 309985 B Rev 00 3 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Main Menu This section describes the options available from the CI main menu Figure 3 2 The CI screens and
174. g the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description S Primary RADIUS Server Secondary RADIUS Server RADIUS UDP Port RADIUS Shared Secret Attenzione In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate non sar possibile accedere all interfaccia della console In tal caso contattare la Nortel Networks per avere assistenza EH VAT LR LIT I Be OPHLUAAZI Fee LTL 1 A i ini EMAJ KERET D SHO CRS RARE emit LED SHACR ELA MBC EEL Ix WU lb 4737rz4AI CO EE Bay Networks T The IP address of the Primary RADIUS server Default 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point The IP address of the Secondary RADIUS server Default 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point The user datagram protocol UDP port for the RADIUS server Default 1645 Range 0 to 65535 Your special switch security code that provides authentication to the RADIUS server Default Null string which will not authenticate Range Any contiguous ASCII string that contains at lea
175. ghtening the thumb screws on the MDA front panel B 6 309985 B Rev 00 Media Dependent Adapters 6 Attach devices to the MDA ports see Attaching Devices to the BayStack 410 24T Switch on page 2 7 After connecting the port cables continue to follow the instructions to connect power and verify the installation Note The IEEE 802 3u specification requires that all ports operating at 100 Mb s use only Category 5 unshielded twisted pair UTP cabling Replacing an MDA with a Different Model When replacing an installed MDA with another type of MDA complete the following steps to clear the switch NVRAM 1 Power down the switch Remove the AC power cord from the power source 2 Remove the installed MDA Loosen the thumbscrews and remove the MDA 3 Install the replacement MDA Be sure to firmly tighten the two thumbscrews on the MDA front panel 4 Power up the switch 309985 B Rev 00 B 7 Appendix C Quick Steps to Features If you are a system administrator with experience configuring BayStack 410 24T switch VLANs MultiLink Trunking Port Mirroring and IGMP Snooping use the flowcharts on the following pages as quick configuration guides The flowcharts refer you to the configuration rules appropriate for each feature The flowcharts cover the following features e 802 1Q VLANs e MultiLink Trunks e Port Mirroring e IGMP Snooping To learn more about Refer to this section 802 1Q VLANs
176. guration rules IGMP Snooping 1 56 MultiLink Trunking 1 73 Port Mirroring 1 86 VLANs 1 51 connectors D 1 AC power receptacle 1 6 DB 9 console comm port connector D 5 RJ 45 port connector D 1 console interface CI connection 2 10 main menu 3 4 menus using 3 2 Console Password field 3 84 Console Port Speed field 3 83 Console Read Only Password field 3 85 3 86 Console Read Write Password field 3 85 3 87 Index 1 console comm port configuration screen 3 82 connecting to terminal 2 11 illustration D 5 pin assignments D 5 Console Comm Port Configuration options 3 5 conventions text Xxv conversation steering 1 19 cooling fans 1 8 crossover cable D 4 customer support xxviii D data communication equipment See DCE DB 9 connector 2 10 DB 9 console comm port connector D 5 DCE 2 10 Declaration of Conformity A 4 Default Gateway field 3 10 default settings E 1 Deferred Packets field 3 81 Designated Root field 3 97 Display Event Log option 3 6 Display Port Statistics option 3 20 Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings option 3 92 E Event Log screen 3 109 authentication failure 3 110 event log flash memory 3 110 excessive bad entries 3 110 operational exception 3 110 software download 3 110 TELNET session status 3 110 write threshold 3 110 Event Logging field 3 100 Excessive Collisions field 3 81 Index 2 F FCS Errors field 3 80 feet chassi
177. guration screen see Port Configuration on page 3 52 This screen allows you to configure a specific switch port all switch ports or when in a stack configuration all stack ports Only appears when a gigabit MDA is installed in one of the units of a stacked configuration When the gigabit MDA is installed selecting this option displays the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen see High Speed Flow Control Configuration on page 3 54 Displays the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 This menu provides the following options MultiLink Trunk Configuration MultiLink Trunk Utilization and Return to Switch Configuration Menu This menu allows you to create and modify trunks and to monitor the bandwidth utilization of configured trunks Displays the Port Mirroring Configuration screen see Port Mirroring Configuration on page 3 64 This screen allows you to designate a single switch port as a traffic monitor for up to two specified ports or addresses Displays the Rate Limiting Configuration screen see Rate Limiting Configuration on page 3 68 This screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 19 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 5 Switch Configuration Menu Screen Options continued Option Description IGMP Configuration Dis
178. gure 1 38 Switch to Switch Trunk Configuration Example n this guide the terms trunk and MLT are used interchangeably to indicate a MultiLink Trunk 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Each of the trunks shown in Figure 1 38 can be configured with up to four switch ports to provide maximum aggregate bandwidth through each trunk in full duplex mode As shown in this example when traffic between switch to switch connections approaches single port bandwidth limitations creating a MultiLink Trunk can supply the additional bandwidth required to improve the performance Figure 1 39 shows a typical switch to server trunk configuration In this example file server FS1 uses dual MAC addresses using one MAC address for each network interface controller NIC For this reason FS1 does not require a trunk assignment FS2 is a single MAC server with a four port NIC and is set up as trunk configuration T1 mm mm C BB Ge Figure 1 39 Switch to Server Trunk Configuration Example BS41032A Client Server Configuration Using MultiLink Trunks Figure 1 40 shows an example of how MultiLink Trunking can be used in a client server configuration In this example both servers are connected directly to switch S1 FS2 is connected through a trunk configuration T1 The switch to switch connections are through trunks
179. h The Baystack 450 switch provides a high speed connection to a Nortel Networks Accelar 1100 switch BayStack 303 and 304 switches are also shown in this high density workgroup example The Accelar 1100 switch is used as a backbone switch connecting to the BayStack 450 switch configured with a gigabit 1000BASE SX MDA for maximum bandwidth The BayStack 303 and 304 switches have 100 Mb s connections to the BayStack 410 24T switch a 1T00BASE TX hub and a 100 Mb s server and 10 Mb s connections to DTE data terminal equipment See the Nortel Networks library Web page support baynetworks com library for online documentation about the Nortel Networks Accelar 1100 switch and the BayStack 303 and 304 switches BayStack 410 24T switch CPE tum Esasen BayStack 303 c ise switch BayStack 450 switch J Sarver 100BASE TX hub Accelar switch Ada 304 Switc Key 10 Mb s 100 Mb s emm 1000 Mb s Gigabit BS41007A Figure 1 8 Configuring Power Workgroups and a Shared Media Hub 309985 B Rev 00 1 25 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Fail Safe Stack Application Figure 1 9 shows eight switches a si
180. hat fiber optic cables are connected to a light source AN Vorsicht Glasfaserkomponenten k nnen Laserlicht bzw Infrarotlicht abstrahlen wodurch Ihre Augen gesch digt werden k nnen Schauen Sie niemals in einen Glasfaser LWL oder ein Anschlufteil Gehen Sie stets davon aus da das Glasfaserkabel an eine Lichtquelle angeschlossen ist Avertissement L quipement fibre optique peut mettre des rayons laser ou infrarouges qui risquent d entrainer des l sions oculaires Ne jamais regarder dans le port d un connecteur ou d un c ble fibre optique Toujours supposer que les c bles fibre optique sont raccord s une source lumineuse Advertencia Los equipos de fibra ptica pueden emitir radiaciones de l ser o infrarrojas que pueden da ar los ojos No mire nunca en el interior de una fibra ptica ni de un puerto de conexi n Suponga siempre que los cables de fibra ptica est n conectados a una fuente luminosa 309985 B Rev 00 B 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch A Avvertenza Le apparecchiature a fibre ottiche emettono raggi laser o infrarossi che possono risultare dannosi per gli occhi Non guardare mai direttamente le fibre ottiche o le porte di collegamento Tenere in considerazione il fatto che i cavi a fibre ottiche sono collegati a una sorgente luminosa AN BG E774 SHEMET CAE oo ev REMO BOLT HILARY Y A h EME ALA
181. he BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 8 MAC Address Security Configuration Screen Fields Field Description MAC Address Security When set to Enabled the software checks source MAC addresses of packets MAC Address Security SNMP Locked Partition Port on Intrusion Partition Time that arrive on secure ports against MAC addresses listed in the MAC Address Security Table for allowed membership see MAC Address Security Port Configuration on page 3 28 If the software detects any source MAC address that is not an allowed member a MAC intrusion event is registered Default Disabled Range Disabled Enabled When this field is set to Enabled the MAC Address Security screens cannot be modified using SNMP Default Disabled Range Disabled Enabled This field value determines how the switch reacts to an intrusion event When an intrusion event is detected see MAC Address Security field description the specified port is set to Disabled partitioned from other switch ports When this field is set to Disabled the port remains Enabled even if an intrusion event is detected Enabled the port becomes Disabled then automatically resets to Enabled depending on the value set in the Partition Time field see Partition Time Field description Forever the port becomes Disabled and remains Disabled partitioned The Partition Time field cannot be used to automatically reset the port to Enabled if you set th
182. he female connector of the RS 232 cable directly to the Console Comm Port on the switch and tighten the captive retaining screws see Figure 2 7 Comm Port 00000 172FC Figure 2 7 Connecting to the Console Comm Port 4 Connect the other end of the cable to a terminal or the serial connector of a personal computer running communications software 5 Proceed to the next section Connecting Power to connect the AC power cord and power up the BayStack 410 24T switch 309985 B Rev 00 2 11 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Connecting Power The BayStack 410 24T switch does not have a power on off switch When you connect the AC power cord to a suitable AC power outlet the switch powers up immediately Warning Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this AN device The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency Vorsicht Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Ger t kann nur durch Ziehen des N Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden Die Netzsteckdose an die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist mu sich stets an einem Ort befinden der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zug nglich ist Avertissement Le d branchement du cordon d alimentation constitue le AN seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension Le cordon d alimentation doit donc toujours tre branch dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mi
183. he following devices e Ethernet networking devices e Individual workstations or servers e Other switches bridges or hubs 309985 B Rev 00 2 7 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Connecting 10BASE T Ports and 10 100 MDA Ports Connect devices to the IOBASE T ports and to the optional 10 100 MDA ports as shown in Figure 2 5 The 1OBASE T switch ports and the 10 100 MDA ports are configured with RJ 45 connectors that are wired as MDI X ports As in conventional Ethernet repeater hubs the BayStack 410 24T switch ports connect via straight through cables to the network interface card NIC in a node or server When connecting to an Ethernet hub or to another switch you must use a crossover cable See Appendix D Connectors and Pin Assignments for more information A standard RJ 45 connection is provided to connect devices to the switch through the 1OBASE T ports and to the 10 100 MDA ports Note The 10 100 MDA ports must use Category 5 UTP cable to accommodate the 1 OOBASE TX functionality To connect the RJ 45 port cables insert the cable plug into the appropriate port connector until the release tab snaps into the locked position Figure 2 5 NORTEL NETWORKS 34 BayStack 410 24T Switch EFFEEF FEES A G 3 400 4TX MDA ee
184. he other device The connection is established through a crossover function which can be a crossover cable or a port that implements the crossover function internally Ports that implement the crossover function internally are known as MDI X ports where X refers to the crossover function Note For the transmitter of one device to connect to the receiver of another device the total number of crossovers must always be an odd number The following sections describe the use of straight through and crossover cables for connecting MDI and MDI X devices 309985 B Rev 00 MDI X to MDI Cable Connections Connectors and Pin Assignments BayStack 410 24T switches use MDI X ports that allow you to connect directly to end stations without using crossover cables Figure D 2 BayStack 410 24T switch 1 8 o 1 I O 2 o 3 o4 o5 I o 6 o7 o8 E MDI X port _ 00 1 8 1 las E 1 Oo 1 20 o2 3o o3 40 o4 50 o5 6 9 L rL o 6 70 o7 Gy Les Straight through cable Figure D 2 MDI X to MDI Cable Connections End station 1 8 104 205 30 40 50 60 70 80 L4 MDI port BS41059A 309985 B Rev 00 D 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch MDI X to MDI X Cable Connections If you are connecting the BayStack 410 24T switch to a device that also implements MDI X ports use a crossover ca
185. he stack configuration see Initial Installation on page 1 29 The Unit Select switch status is displayed on the BayStack 410 24T switch LED display panel When the Unit Select switch is in the Base up position all other Unit Select switches in the stack configuration must be set to Off down Cascade A In Connector Provides an attachment point for accepting a cascade cable connection from an adjacent unit in the stack A return cable from this unit s Cascade A Out connector to the adjacent unit s Cascade A In connector completes the stack connection see the example shown in Figure 1 11 Cascade A Out Cascade A In Cascade Module Unit 1 Redundant Power l 2 Gasca AOU Unit Select Cascade Zn AGNES z Bas fsseade ode n F scade Mo Unit 2 Redundant Power Cascade A In PS BayStack AN STI neto 1 Base unit 2 303978 A cascade cable 3 303978 A cascade cable used for return BS41010A Figure 1 11 Connecting Cascade Cables 1 28 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Note For stacking three or more units maximum 8 units per stack order the optional 1 meter 3 28 ft cascade return cable Order No AL2018001 Base Unit The base unit is the unique stack unit that is configured by the Unit Select switch on the front panel of the 400 ST1 cascade module One unit in the
186. he switch is connected to the upstream unit s Cascade A In connector Yellow On The Cascade A Out connector CAS Up for this switch is looped internally wrapped to the secondary ring Yellow Blinking Incompatible software revision or unable to obtain a unit or ID Renumber Stack Unit table full The unit is on the ring Green but cannot participate in the stack configuration CAS Dwn Stack mode Off The switch is in standalone mode Green On The switch is connected to the downstream unit s Cascade A Out connector Yellow On The Cascade A In connector CAS Dwn for this switch is looped internally wrapped to the secondary ring Yellow Blinking Incompatible software revision or unable to obtain a unit or ID Renumber Stack Unit table full The unit is on the ring Green but cannot participate in the stack configuration Base Base mode Green On The switch is configured as the stack base unit Off The switch is not configured as the stack base unit or is in standalone mode Blinking Stack configuration error Indicates that multiple base units or no base units are configured in the stack Yellow On This unit is operating as the stack configuration s temporary base unit This condition occurs automatically if the base unit directly downstream from this unit fails If this happens the following events take place The two units directly upstream and directly downstream from the failed unit automatically wrap their cascade connectors and
187. hes 1 41 VLANs Spanning Multiple Untagged Switches suss 1 42 Possible Problems with VLANs and Spanning Tree Protocol 1 43 Multiple VLANs Sharing Resources esses 1 44 VLAN Broadcast Domains Within the Switch esssess 1 45 Default VLAN Configuration Screen Example ssssss 1 46 VLAN Configuration Screen Example sse 1 47 Default VLAN Port Configuration Screen Example 1 48 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Example sssssssss 1 49 XV xvi Figure 1 30 Figure 1 31 Figure 1 32 Figure 1 33 Figure 1 34 Figure 1 35 Figure 1 36 Figure 1 37 Figure 1 38 Figure 1 39 Figure 1 40 Figure 1 41 Figure 1 42 Figure 1 43 Figure 1 44 Figure 1 45 Figure 1 46 Figure 1 47 Figure 1 48 Figure 1 49 Figure 1 50 Figure 1 51 Figure 1 52 Figure 1 53 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 VLAN Configuration Spanning Multiple Switches 1 50 IP Multicast Propagation With IGMP Routing e 1 53 BayStack 410 24T Switch Filtering IP Multicast Streams 1 of 2 1 54 BayStack 410 24T Switch Filtering IP Multicast Streams 2 of 2 1 55 Prioritizing
188. hese switches only one link between each pair of switches will be forwarding traffic Because each port belongs to only one VLAN at a time connectivity on the other VLAN will be lost Exercise care when configuring the switches to ensure that the VLAN configuration does not conflict with spanning tree configuration 1 42 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch To connect multiple VLANs across switches with redundant links the STP must be disabled on all participating switch ports Figure 1 23 shows possible consequences of enabling the STP when using VLANs between untagged non 802 1Q tagged switches Station A Non 802 1Q d tagged switch 31 as X 7 Lise e i VLAN1 f VLAN2 No Communications Forwarding Blocking Non 802 1Q i me tagged switch Li 7 Jeo da Ei 2 m Station B BS41022A Figure 1 23 Possible Problems with VLANs and Spanning Tree Protocol As shown in Figure 1 23 with STP enabled only one connection between S1 and S2 is forwarding at any time Communications failure occurs between VLAN 2 of S1 and VLAN 2 of S2 blocking communications between Stations A and B The link connecting VLAN 1 on Switches S1 and S2 is selected as the forwarding link based on port speed duplex mode and port priority Because the other link connecting VLAN 2 is placed
189. i conservarle in un luogo sicuro Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate non sar possibile accedere all interfaccia della console In tal caso contattare la Nortel Networks per avere assistenza EB VATLEMLEF I SIL bOAMAI FERETS Be HTRLIAAD LER ROTETE FE LETSEL MLLIWIAV FEEBATLEID E Iy Ych ff Va ITref All FV TATE EGTA COS SIE Bay Networks C 3e e ESL Console Read Only When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password for TELNET Stack Password for Console or for Both this field allows read only password access to the CI of any participating switch in a stack configuration Users can access the Cl using the correct password see default but cannot change any parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to Default option Default Value user Range An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters continued 3 86 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Console Read Write Stack Password When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password for TELNET for Console or for Both this field allows read write password access to the CI of any participating switch in a stack configuration Users can log in to the Cl using the correct password see default and can change any parameter except the switch password You can change the default passwords for read onl
190. ibed above Copying an Existing Field into an Adjacent Field You can use the period character to copy a previously entered field value into the field directly next to it For example to copy the Allowed Source S3 shown in Figure 3 15 on page 3 36 into the next field entry 6 1 Enter a MAC address into the next MAC Address field 2 Highlight the blank Allowed Source field 3 Enter the period character and press Enter The port number list from the previous entry is copied into the new field 3 34 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface MAC Address Security Table The MAC Address Security Table screen allows you to specify the ports that each MAC address is allowed to access You must also include the MAC addresses of any routers and switches that are connected to any secure ports There are 16 available MAC Address Security Table screens you can use to create as many as 448 MAC address entries Twenty eight MAC address entries are displayed on each screen see Figure 3 14 MAC Address Security Table ES Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 N MAC Address Allowed Sou MAC Address Allowed Source Screen 1 N Press Ctrl N to display next scheen Enter MAC Address xx xx Xx Xx 9NXx press Return or Enter when complete Press Ctrl R to return to previousNmenu 7 MAC Address Security Table MAC Address Security Table Find an Address 00 00 00 00 00 0
191. ibes the MAC Address Security Configuration screen fields 3 36 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 11 Using the Console Interface MAC Address Security Table Screen Fields Field Description Find an Address MAC Address Allowed Source Allows you to search for a specific MAC address that is used in any of the MAC Address Security Table screens Allows you to specify up to 448 MAC addresses that are authorized to access the switch You can specify the ports that each MAC address is allowed to access using the Allowed Source field see next field description The specified MAC address does not take effect until the Allowed Source field is set to some value a single unit port number or a port list value that you previously configured in the MAC Address Security Port Lists screen You can clear an existing MAC address field by entering zero 0 in the field and pressing Enter Default no address assigned Range A range of 6 Hex Octets separated by dashes multicast and broadcast addresses are not allowed Allows you to specify the ports that each MAC address is allowed to access The options for the Allowed Source field include a single unit port number or a port list value that you have previously configured in the MAC Address Security Port Lists screen Default Blank field Range A single unit port or a port list value for example 1 3 1 6 3 4 S1 S5 etc 1 Multicast address Note that
192. ic Disabled 3 TE z7 lt Jt Normal Basic Disabled 4 lt ES 7 Jt Normal Basic Disabled 5 lt lt Jt Normal Basic Disabled 6 jum 7 Ju 3 Jt Normal Basic Disabled Trunk Trunk Name 1 S3 T4 to S1 2 Trunk 2 3 Trunk 3 4 Trunk 44 5 Trunk 5 6 Trunk 6 Enter text press Return or Enter when complete inl Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main M Figure 1 44 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S3 Switch S3 is configured as follows e Trunk read only indicates the trunk 1 to 6 that corresponds to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields Trunk Members Unit Port indicates the ports that can be configured in each row to create the corresponding trunk Ports 1 and 3 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 1 309985 B Rev 00 1 69 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch STP Learning indicates the spanning tree participation setting for each of the trunks Trunk 1 is enabled for Normal STP Learning Trunk Mode read only indicates the Trunk Mode for each of the trunks The Trunk Mode field value for trunk 1 is set to Basic Source MAC addresses are statically assigned to specific trunk members for flooding and forwarding This allows the switch to stabilize and distribute the data streams of source addresses across the trunk members Trunk Status indicates the Trunk
193. ignated monitor port to use this feature contact your Nortel Networks sales agent for details about the StackProbe The following sections provide example configurations for both monitoring modes available with the port mirroring feature e Port based mirroring e Address based mirroring A sample of the Port Mirroring Configuration screen is provided with each of the examples to support the network configuration example Note that in the following examples the displayed screens do not show all of the screen prompts that precede some actions For example when you configure a switch for port mirroring or when you modify an existing port mirroring configuration the new configuration does not take effect until you respond Yes to the following screen prompt Is your port mirroring configuration complete 1 80 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Port Based Mirroring Configuration Figure 1 50 shows an example of a port based mirroring configuration where port 23 is designated as the monitor port for ports 24 and 25 of switch S1 Although this example shows ports 24 and 25 monitored by the monitor port port 23 any of the trunk members of T1 and T2 can also be monitored Note Trunks cannot be monitored and trunk members cannot be configured gt ce as monitor ports see MultiLink Trunking Configuration Rules on page 1 73 StackProbe Mon
194. iguration screen e Ifthe VLAN settings of any trunk member are changed the VLAN settings of all members of that trunk are changed similarly e When any trunk member is set to Disabled not active through the Port Configuration screen or through network management the trunk member is removed from the trunk The removed trunk member has to be reconfigured through the Trunk Configuration screen to rejoin the trunk A screen prompt precedes this action A trunk member cannot be disabled if there are only two trunk members on the trunk e A trunk member cannot be configured as a monitor port see Port Mirroring Configuration on page 3 64 e Trunks cannot be monitored by a monitor port however trunk members can be monitored see Port Based Mirroring Configuration on page 1 81 e All trunk members must have identical IGMP configurations e If the IGMP snooping configuration for any trunk member is changed the IGMP snooping settings for all trunk members are changed 1 74 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch How the MultiLink Trunk Reacts to Losing Distributed Trunk Members If your MultiLink Trunk Figure 1 46 spans separate units in a stack configuration and any of those units or trunked MDAs becomes inactive from a loss of power or unit failure the unaffected trunk members remain operational BayStack 410 24T Switches
195. igure C 4 Figure C 5 Figure C 6 Figure C 7 Rate Limiting Configuration Screen 2 of 2 sssssssss 3 69 IGMP Configuration Menu Screen ccce eese opoe kenne ne venue cene 3 71 GMP Congue SSOOBEI sae iiia annia Fea EG dx ut 3 73 Multicast Group Membership Screen sssssssseee 3 77 Pori SBTC bog MEME dR 3 78 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen ssssssssss 3 82 Fienumber Stack Units SONT aus ic eret e veo bk seo S E RL ee tob adu usindi 3 89 Hardware Unit Information Screen sse 3 81 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen sss 3 92 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen 1 of 2 suss 3 93 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen 2 of 2 essees 3 94 Spanning Tree Switch Settings Screen ssesssssesess 3 96 TELNET DomigHrador Sreem aene e adno den E ber a Radon 3 99 Software Download Screen essei dmn uua Eran agua 3 103 Configuration File Download Upload Screen sssss 3 106 Event Log SOPBBIY suse kPa e broad acd Oeo ad deo o oL pr bb 3 109 Sample Event Log Entry Showing Excessive Bad Entries 3 110 Sample Event Log Entry Exceeding the Write Threshold 3 111 Sample Event Log Entry Showing Flash Update Status 3 111 Self Test Screen After Resetting the Switch ussssus 3 112 Nortel N
196. ill of materials If any items are missing or damaged contact the sales agent or the customer service representative from whom you purchased the BayStack 410 24T switch 2 2 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Installation Procedure This section provides the requirements and instructions for installing the BayStack 410 24T switch on a flat surface or in a standard 19 inch utility rack If you install the switch in a rack ground the rack to the same grounding electrode used by the power service in the area The ground path must be permanent and must not exceed 1 ohm of resistance from the rack to the grounding electrode Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch on a Flat Surface Caution When this device is installed in a stack on a shelf or tabletop the accumulated weight of the port cables increases with the height of the shelf or tabletop Achtung Wenn dieses Ger t in einem Stapel auf einem Tisch oder einem Regalboden installiert wird erh ht sich das Gesamtgewicht der Schnittstellenkabel mit der H he des Regalbodens oder Tisches Attention Si l appareil est pos dans un rack ou sur une tag re notez bien que le poids du c blage r seau augmente avec la hauteur de l installation Precauci n Cuando este dispositivo se instala apilado en un estante o sobre una mesa el peso acumulado de los cables de los puertos aumenta seg n la altura del estante o de la mesa Attenzione Q
197. in 10 minutes of changing configuration parameters without resetting can cause the changed configuration parameters to be lost 309985 B Rev 00 1 17 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Autosensing and Autonegotiation BayStack 410 24T switches are autosensing and autonegotiating devices The term autosense refers to a port s ability to sense the speed of an attached device The term autonegotiation refers to a standardized protocol IEEE 802 3u that exists between two IEEE 802 3u capable devices Because the BayStack 410 24T switch uses fixed 1OBASE T ports the autonegotiation feature does not negotiate the port speed when connecting to another IEEE 802 3u capable device The BayStack 410 24T switch only negotiates the best duplex mode When an optional 10 100 BASE T MDA is installed the autonegotiation feature selects the best of both speed and duplex modes for that connection The MDA ports negotiate down from 100 Mb s speed and full duplex mode until a supported speed and duplex mode is acknowledged by the attached device Autosensing is used when the attached device is not capable of autonegotiation or is using a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802 3u autonegotiation standard In this case because it is not possible to sense the duplex mode of the attached device the BayStack 410 24T switch reverts to half duplex mode For more information about autosensing and autonegotiation modes se
198. ing 1 37 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN workgroups 1 36 U Undersized Packets field 3 80 unregistered packet frame 1 37 untagged frame 1 37 untagged member 1 37 Uplink Expansion slot 1 3 user priority 1 37 utility rack 2 3 V virtual LAN VLAN 1 22 configuration rules 1 51 network example 1 22 VLAN Configuration option 3 19 VLAN Configuration screen 3 39 VLAN Identifier VID 1 37 VLAN port members 1 37 VLANs IEEE 802 1Q VLANS feature 1 19 Index 6 309985 B Rev 00
199. ink signals from unit 3 e Unit 2 and unit 4 automatically loop their internal stack signals A and B e The Cas Up LED for unit 2 and the Cas Dwn LED for unit 4 turn on yellow to indicate that the stack signals are looped 3 The remaining stack units remain connected Although the example shown in Figure 1 14 shows a failed unit causing the stack to loop signals at the points of failure A and B the system reacts the same way if a cable is removed 1 34 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Cascade A Out Cascade A In Unit 2 Unit 3 Unit 4 Unit 5 1 Base unit 2 Last unit 3 Cascade cable PN 303978 A 4 Cascade max return cable PN 303979 A BS41013A Figure 1 14 Redundant Cascade Stacking Feature 309985 B Rev 00 1 35 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Workgroups BayStack 410 24T switches support up to 64 VLANs with 802 1Q tagging available per port Ports are grouped into broadcast domains by assigning them to the same VLAN Frames received in one VLAN can only be forwarded within that VLAN and IP Multicast frames and unknown unicast frames are flooded only to ports in the same VLAN Setting up virtual LANs VLANs is a way to segment networks to increase network capacity and performance without changing the physical network topology Figure 1
200. ion This port will be monitored according to the value Y in the Monitoring Mode field see Table 3 25 Default Value Zero length string Range 1 to 8 1 to 28 depending on model type Indicates the MAC addresses that will be monitored by the designated port monitor when one of the address based monitoring modes is selected This port will be monitored according to the value Address A in the selected Monitoring Mode field see Table 3 25 Users can enter the MAC address from this screen or from the MAC Address Table screen The entry is displayed and can be modified by either screen see MAC Address Table on page 3 20 Default Value 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF Indicates the MAC addresses that will be monitored by the designated port monitor when one of the address based monitoring modes is selected This port will be monitored according to the value Address B in the selected Monitoring Mode field see Table 3 25 Users can enter the MAC address from this screen or from the MAC Address Table screen The entry is displayed and can be modified by either screen see MAC Address Table on page 3 20 Default Value 00 00 00 00 00 00 no MAC address assigned Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 to FF FF FF FF FF FF 3 66 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 25 describes the various monitoring modes available from the Port Mirroring Configuration screen
201. iptions of the front panel components follow the figure For a description of the components located on the back panel of the BayStack 410 24T switch see Back Panel on page 1 6 ic Comm Port NORTEL onis BayStack 410 24T Switch 000 1 g 5 7 E n 13 15 7 19 n 2 2 4 s a 10 2 m 16 18 20 2 2 BayStack 410 24T 12 Comm Port 2 Uplink Expansion slot 3 10BASE T port connectors 4 LED display panel BS41002A Figure 1 2 BayStack 410 24T Switch Front Panel Comm Port The Comm Port also referred to as the Console Comm Port allows you to access the console interface CI screens and customize your network using the supplied menus and screens see Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface The Console Comm Port is a DB 9 RS 232 D male serial port connector You can use this connector to connect a management station or console terminal to the switch by using a straight through DB 9 to DB 9 standard serial port cable see Console Comm Port on page 2 10 1 2 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Note The Console Comm Port is configured as a data communications equipment DCE connector Ensure that your RS 232 cable pinouts are configured for DCE connections see DB 9 RS 232 D Console Comm Port Connector on page D 5 The console port default settings are 96
202. is field to Forever You can always manually set the port s status field to Enabled using the Port Configuration screen see your switch s User Guide for more information Default Disabled Range Disabled Forever Enabled This field appears only if the Partition Port on Intrusion field is set to Enabled see Partition Port on Intrusion Detected field This field value determines the length of time a partitioned port remains Disabled This field is not operational when the Partition Port on Intrusion field is set to Forever Default 1 second Range 0 65536 seconds the value 0 indicates forever continued 3 26 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 8 MAC Address Security Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description DA Filtering on Intrusion Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion Clear by Ports Learn by Ports Current Learning Mode When set to Enabled this field isolates the intruding node by filtering discarding packets sent to that MAC address Default Disabled Range Disabled Enabled When set to Enabled and a MAC intrusion event is detected the software issues an SNMP trap message to all registered SNMP trap addresses see your switch s User Guide for more information Default Disabled Range Disabled Enabled This field clears the specified port or ports that are listed in the Allowed Source field of the MAC Address Security Table screen see MAC Address Securi
203. is reconfigured as a standard switch port no longer a monitor port the port becomes enabled for spanning tree participation When creating a port based port mirroring configuration be sure that the monitor port and both of the mirrored ports port X and port Y have the same configuration Use the VLAN Configuration screen to configure the VLAN see VLAN Configuration on page 3 40 VLAN configuration settings for any ports configured for port based mirroring cannot be changed Use the Port Mirroring Configuration screen to disable port mirroring or reconfigure the port mirroring ports then change the VLAN configuration settings For port based monitoring of traffic use one of the following modes for monitoring broadcast IP Multicast or unknown DA frames Monitor all traffic received by port X Monitor all traffic transmitted by port X Monitor all traffic received and transmitted by port X For more information about using the Port Mirroring feature see Port Mirroring Configuration on page 3 64 See also Appendix C Quick Steps to Features for configuration flowcharts that can help you use this feature 309985 B Rev 00 Chapter 2 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch This chapter covers the following topics e Installation requirements e Installation procedure e Instructions for connecting power e Instructions for verifying the installation e Instructions for the initial standalone switch se
204. ists using up to five MAC Address Security Port Lists screens see Figure 3 12 Screen 1 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screen 2 MAC Address Security Port Lists Port List Screen 3 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screen 4 Screen 5 Press Ctrl P to display previous screen Enter unit port 1 NONE 1 ALL 2 3 4 7 9 press Return or Enter when done Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 12 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screens 5 Screens Choose MAC Address Security Port Lists or press 1 from the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu to display the MAC Address Security Port Lists screen Figure 3 13 iiid The following screen shows an example of typical user input in boldface ype 309985 B Rev 00 3 31 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch i MAC Address Security Port Lists A Entry Port List sl 1 1 7 2 1 7 2 9 3 1 4 4 12 S2 2 1 7 2 9 4 3 5 S3 1 3 2 7 3 1 4 S4 4 12 S5 1 NONE 2 NONE 3 NONE 4 NONE S6 1 ALL 2 ALL 3 ALL 4 ALL S7 3 ALL More Press Ctrl N to display next screen Enter unit port 1 NONE 1 ALL 2 3 4 7 9 press Return or Enter when done Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main iM Figure 3 13 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screen Table 3 10 describes the MAC Address Security Port Lis
205. itch disconnect and then reconnect the AC power cord then verify that the switch follows the normal power up sequence A Warning To avoid bodily injury from hazardous electrical current never remove the top cover of the device There are no user serviceable components inside AN Vorsicht Um Verletzungsgefahr durch einen elektrischen Stromschlag auszuschlie en nehmen Sie niemals die obere Abdeckung vom Ger t ab Im Ger teinnern befinden sich keine Komponenten die vom Benutzer gewartet werden k nnen AN Avertissement Pour viter tout risque d lectrocution ne jamais retirer le capot de l appareil Cet appareil ne contient aucune pi ce accessible par l utilisateur 309985 B Rev 00 Troubleshooting AN AN Advertencia A fin de evitar da os personales por corrientes el ctricas peligrosas no desmonte nunca la cubierta superior de este dispositivo Los componentes internos no son reparables por el usuario Avvertenza Per evitare lesioni fisiche dovute a scariche pericolose di corrente non rimuovere mai il coperchio superiore del dispositivo I componenti interni non possono essere manipolati dall utente A EG MA TEmO Daik AT Sel TAi AD ERD ERLTRY a GLT E AAIE Isia LpA kY EA Normal Power Up Sequence Table 4 2 In a normal power up sequence the LEDs appear as follows 1 After power is applied to the switch the Pwr Power LED turns on within 5 seconds 2
206. itor port odode BEH ce port 23 Port X port 25 ows oo ey NES Jr ga 9 AR asi i F Port Y port 24 BS41037A Figure 1 50 Port Based Mirroring Configuration Example Figure 1 51 shows the Port Mirroring Configuration screen setup for this example 309985 B Rev 00 1 81 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch In the configuration example shown in Figure 1 50 the designated monitor port port 23 can be set to monitor traffic in any of the following modes Monitor all traffic received by port X e Monitor all traffic transmitted by port X Monitor all traffic received and transmitted by port X Monitor all traffic received by port X or transmitted by port Y e Monitor all traffic received by port X destined to port Y and then transmitted by port Y e Monitor all traffic received transmitted by port X and received transmitted by port Y conversations between port X and port Y As shown in the Port Mirroring Configuration screen example Figure 1 51 port 23 is designated as
207. k ck ck ck kk ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck ck ck Sk 0k Ck ck ck kk ck ck kk ckck ck ok kk ck ck kk Sk Sk kA A ko ko ko Enter Ctrl Y to begin Figure 2 12 Nortel Networks Logo Screen Note The Nortel Networks logo screen for your switch will display the BayStack 410 24T model number and the current hardware firmware and software versions Upon successful completion of the power up self tests the switch is ready for normal operation To access the BayStack 410 24T Main Menu press Ctrl Y 2 16 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Initial Setup The BayStack 410 24T switch is designed for plug and play operation in most cases the switch can be installed and made operational using the system default settings see Appendix E Default Settings for a list of default settings for the BayStack 410 24T switch However for the switch management function to become fully operational certain parameters must be configured A minimal configuration is required when you plan on remote management or TFTP operations If you are configuring your BayStack 410 24T switches into a stack configuration you will need to supply additional parameters to properly setup the stack This section includes the following information e Instructions for the initial standalone switch setup e Instructions for the initial stack setup After setting up your switch or stack configur
208. l Networks The MDAs can support high speed connections to servers shared Fast Ethernet hubs or backbone devices Note The MDA is not hot swappable Power down the switch before installing or removing an MDA The following MDA models are available Type Model Description See Page 10BASE T 100BASE TX 400 4TX MDA 4 port twisted pair RJ 45 B 2 connectors 100BASE FX Fiber 400 2FX MDA 2 port multimode fiber SC B 3 connectors 400 4FX MDA 4 port multimode fiber MT RJ connectors Nortel Networks is constantly adding new models and features to existing product lines See your Nortel Networks sales representative for a full range of available MDAs Note The BayStack 410 24T switch does not support Gigabit MDAs 309985 B Rev 00 B 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch 10BASE T 100BASE TX MDA The 400 4TX MDA Figure B 1 uses four IOBASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 8 pin modular port connectors to attach Ethernet devices Table B 1 describes the 400 4TX MDA components and LEDs 400 4TX MDA BS41046A Figure B 1 400 4TX MDA Front Panel Table B 1 400 4TX MDA Components Item Label Description 1 100 100BASE TX port status LEDs green On The corresponding port is set to operate at 100 Mb s Off The link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Blinking The corresponding port is management disabled 2 10 10BASE T port status LEDs g
209. le must already exist on your TFTP server and must be read write enabled Default Value Zero length string Range An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters The IP address of your TFTP load host Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point Specifies whether to copy the presently configured switch stack parameters to the specified TFTP server default is No Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes Press Enter to initiate the process Default Value No Range Yes No Specifies whether to retrieve the stored switch stack configuration parameters from the specified TFTP server default is No If you choose Yes the download process begins immediately and when completed causes the switch stack to reset with the new configuration parameters Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes Press Enter to initiate the process Default Value No Range Yes No Requirements The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack configuration parameters to other stack configurations For example you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a stack configuration and use it to configure a standalone switch 309985 B Rev 00 3 107 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T
210. le 3 31 Using the Console Interface Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Comm Port Stop Bits Console Port Speed 2 A read only field that indicates the current console comm port stop bit setting Allows you to set the console comm port baud rate to match the baud rate of the console terminal Default Value 9600 Baud Range 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19200 Baud 38400 Baud Caution If you choose a baud rate that does not match your console terminal baud rate you will lose communication with the configuration interface when you press Enter If communication is lost set your console terminal to match the new service port setting Achtung Bei Auswahl einer Baudrate die nicht mit der Baudrate des Konsolenterminals bereinstimmt geht die Kommunikation mit der Konsolenschnittstelle verloren wenn Sie die Eingabetaste dr cken Stellen Sie in diesem Fall das Konsolenterminal so ein daB es mit der neuen Einstellung der Service Schnittstelle bereinstimmt Attention Si vous s lectionnez un d bit diff rent de celui de votre terminal vous perdrez le contact avec l interface de votre console d s que vous appuierez sur Entr e Pour restaurer la communication alignez le d bit de votre terminal sur le nouveau d bit de votre port de service Precauci n Si selecciona una velocidad de transmisi n que no coincide con la velocidad de transmisi n
211. level assigned to untagged frames received on a port This value becomes the user priority for the frame Tagged packets get their user priority from the value contained in the 802 1Q frame header Unregistered packet a tagged frame which contains a VID where the receiving port is not a member of that VLAN 309985 B Rev 00 1 37 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Filtering database identifier FID the specific filtering forwarding database within the BayStack 410 24T switch that is assigned to each VLAN The current version of software assigns all VLANs to the same FID This is referred to as Shared VLAN Learning in the IEEE 802 1Q specification The default configuration settings for BayStack 410 24T switches have all ports set as untagged members of VLAN 1 with all ports configured as PVID 1 Every VLAN is assigned a unique VLAN identifier VID which distinguishes it from all other VLANs In the default configuration example shown in Figure 1 16 all incoming packets are assigned to VLAN 1 by the default port VLAN identifier PVID 1 Untagged packets enter and leave the switch unchanged 802 1Q Switch VLAN 1 PP Teg E S Port 1 Port2 Port3 Port4 Port5 Port6 Port 7 Port 8 PVID 1 1 DA CRC SA Incoming Outgoing Data untagged Data untagged packet packet unch
212. ll be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date Software is first shipped to Licensee Nortel Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Nortel Networks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Nortel Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Nortel Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been 1 altered except by Nortel Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
213. ly field that indicates the number of resets since the operational firmware was first loaded on the switch Default Value 1 Range 0 to 2 1 A read only field that indicates the last type of reset Default Value Power Cycle Range Power Cycle Software Download Management Reset Management Factory Reset A read only field that indicates the current power source primary RPSU or both Default Value Primary Power Range Primary Power Redundant Power Primary and Redundant Power A read only field that indicates the MDA type that is configured in this unit A read only field that specifies the hardware and software version continued 3 16 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 4 Using the Console Interface System Characteristics Screen Fields continued Field Description sysObjectlD sysUpTime sysServices sysContact sysName sysLocation A read only field that provides a unique identification of the switch which contains the vendors private enterprise number A read only field that shows the length of time since the last reset Note that this field is updated when the screen is redisplayed A read only field that indicates the switch s physical and data link layer functionality The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch Default Value Zero length string Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters A name that uniquely identifies the switch Default Value Zero leng
214. ly when automatically configuring a switch or stack using this feature see Requirements on page 3 107 You must set up the file on your TFTP server and set the filename read write permission to Enabled before you can save the configuration parameters Although most configuration parameters are saved to the configuration file certain parameters are not saved see Table 3 40 on page 3 108 Choose Configuration File or press g from the main menu to open the Configuration File Download Upload screen Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Copy Configuration Image to Server Retrieve Configuration Image from Server Configuration File Download Upload UN XX XXX XXX X Enter text press Return or Enter when complete reas Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main enu d Figure 3 44 Configuration File Download Upload Screen Table 3 39 describes the Configuration File Download Upload screen fields 3 106 309985 B Rev 00 Table 3 39 Using the Console Interface Configuration File Download Upload Screen Fields Field Description Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Copy Configuration Image to Server Retrieve Configuration Image from Server The file name you have chosen for the configuration file Choose a meaningful file name that will allow you to identify the file for retrieval when required The fi
215. me as belonging to a specific VLAN Untagged frames are marked tagged with this classification as they leave the switch through a port that is configured as a tagged port Untagged frame a frame that does not carry any VLAN tagging information in the frame header VLAN port members a set of ports that form a broadcast domain for a specific VLAN A port can be a member of one or more VLANs Untagged member a port that has been configured as an untagged member of a specific VLAN When an untagged frame exits the switch through an untagged member port the frame header remains unchanged When a tagged frame exits the switch through an untagged member port the tag is stripped and the tagged frame is changed to an untagged frame Tagged member a port that has been configured as a member of a specific VLAN When an untagged frame exits the switch through a tagged member port the frame header is modified to include the 32 bit tag associated with the VLAN assigned to that frame When a tagged frame exits the switch through a tagged member port the frame header remains unchanged original VID remains User priority a three bit field in the header of a tagged frame The field is interpreted as a binary number therefore has a value of 0 7 This field allows the tagged frame to carry the user priority across bridged LANs where the individual LAN segments may be unable to signal priority information Port priority the priority
216. n Menu Standalone Switch Example ssessssss 2 21 Main Menu Stack Configuration Example sssssss 2 21 IP Configuration Setup Screen Stack Configuration 2 22 Map of Console Interface Screens as coicscsoiccessesienasevestsmonersciiannotsncianies 3 3 Console Interface Main Ment ascen atten nh eit nn 3 4 IP Configuration Setup Screen cccccceceececesceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeenseneees 3 8 SNMP COU RATION CREST s oouioi etae eec aa uaa trace prep Ue EE ci DUREE 3 13 System Characteristics Screen crussis inis iniinda kiN nini ari 3 15 Switch Configuration Menu Screen 22i cassesciscentasnsasseraseiacertescsedeaicnenvledee 3 18 MAC Address Table SOFephi ipee dice cto eaS 3 21 MAC Address Security Configuration Menu sss 3 23 MAC Address Security Configuration Screen sess 3 25 MAC Address Security Port Configuration Screen 1 of 2 3 28 MAC Address Security Port Configuration Screen 2 of 2 3 29 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screens 5 Screens 3 31 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screen esses 3 32 MAC Address Security Table Screens 16 Screens 3 35 MAG Address Security Table Screen ccccccccccssoccssoncesteecsersensttcesassteressecoeee 3 36 VLAN Configuration Menu Screen sssssss
217. n about configuring VLANs see VLAN Configuration Menu on page 3 38 See also Appendix C Quick Steps to Features for configuration flowcharts that can help you use this feature 309985 B Rev 00 1 51 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch IGMP Snooping BayStack 410 24T switches can sense IGMP host membership reports from attached stations and use this information to set up a dedicated path between the requesting station and a local IP Multicast router After the pathway is established the BayStack 410 24T switch blocks the IP Multicast stream from exiting any other port that does not connect to another host member thus conserving bandwidth The following discussion describes how BayStack 410 24T switches provide the same benefit as IP Multicast routers but in the local area Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used by IP Multicast routers to learn about the existence of host group members on their directly attached subnets see RFC 2236 The IP Multicast routers get this information by broadcasting IGMP queries and listening for IP hosts reporting their host group memberships This process is used to set up a client server relationship between an IP Multicast source that provides the data streams and the clients that want to receive the data Figure 1 31 shows how IGMP is used to set up the path between the client and server As shown in this example the IGMP host provides an IP Multicast stream to designat
218. n alphabetical listing of the topics and subtopics in this Index guide with cross references to relevant information xxiv 309985 B Rev 00 Text Conventions Preface This guide uses the following text conventions bold text italic text Screen text Enter Ctrl C Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it Indicates system output for example prompts and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters Named keys in text are enclosed in square brackets The notation Enter is used for the Enter key and the Return key Two or more keys that must be pressed simultaneously are shown in text linked with a hyphen sign 309985 B Rev 00 XXV Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Acronyms This guide uses the following acronyms AUI BootP BPDU CI CRC CSMA CD CTS DCE DSR DTE ECM FID HRPSU IGMP IP ISO LED MAC MAU MDA MDI MDI X MIB MLT NIC NMS attachment unit interface Bootstrap Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Unit console interface cycli
219. ndalone switch or any participating switch in a stack configuration Choose Console Comm Port Configuration or press o from the main menu to open the Console Comm Port Configuration screen a Console Comm Port Configuration UN Comm Port Data Bits 8 Data Bits Comm Port Parity No Parity Comm Port Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit Console Port Speed 9600 Baud Console Switch Password Type None Console Stack Password Type None ELNET Switch Password Type None INET Stack Password Type None Console Read Only Switch Password user Console Read Write Switch Password secure Console Read Only Stack Password user Console Read Write Stack Password secure Primary RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 RADIUS UDP Port 1645 RADIUS Shared Secret Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice Em Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main a Figure 3 35 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Table 3 31 describes the Console Comm Port Configuration screen fields Table 3 31 Console Comm Port Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Comm Port Data Bits A read only field that indicates the current console comm port data bit setting Comm Port Parity A read only field that indicates the current console comm port parity setting continued 3 82 309985 B Rev 00 Tab
220. ngle BayStack 450 switch and seven BayStack 410 24T switches that are stacked together as a single managed unit If any unit in the stack fails the remaining stack remains operational As shown in Figure 1 9 an Accelar 1100 switch is used as a backbone switch connecting to a BayStack 450 switch with an optional gigabit I000BASE SX MDA for maximum bandwidth the BayStack 410 24T switch does not support gigabit MDAs This configuration uses optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Modules to connect the switches in the fail safe stack For an overview of the fail safe stacking feature that is available for the BayStack 410 24T switches see Stack Operation following this section Accelar switch ae R Up to o eee ieee s fee bx 24 users F Up to 28 users BayStack 450 24T L222 Up to BayStack 410 24T IE 3 E 28 users BayStack 410 24T Up to BayStack 410 24T E eg users BayStack 410 24T Up to 28 users BayStack 410 24T E e Up to BayStack 410 24T to 28 users BayStack 410 24T C
221. nu screen to open the IGMP Configuration screen 3 72 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface N IGMP Configuration VLAN 5 J Snooping Enabled Proxy Enabled Robust Value 2 Query Time 125 seconds Set Router Ports Version 1 Static Router Ports 1 6 7 12 13 18 19 24 25 28 Unit 1 X X Unit 2 X X Unit 3 Unit 4 X KEY X IGMP Port Member and VLAN Member Not an IGMP Member Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Figure 3 32 IGMP Configuration Screen Table 3 28 describes the IGMP Configuration screen fields Table 3 28 IGMP Configuration Screen Fields Field Description VLAN Allows you to set up or view IGMP configurations on specified VLANs You can use the space bar to toggle to any existing IGMP configurations the maximum number of VLANs that can be displayed is 64 Default 1 Range 1 to 4094 continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 73 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 28 IGMP Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Snooping Allows you to enable or disable IGMP Snooping This field affects all VLANs for example if you disable Snooping for the VLAN specified in the screen s VLAN field Snooping is disabled for ALL VLANs Default Value Enabled Range Enabled
222. o Port Name Unit 1 Port 1 PVID 1 Port Priority 0 Tagging Untagged Access VLAN Display by Port page 3 49 Unit 1 Port 1 PVID 1 read only Port Name Unit 1 Port 1 read only Traffic Class Configuration page 3 50 Traffic Class Low continued 309985 B Rev 00 E 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table E 1 Factory Default Settings for the BayStack 410 24T Switch continued Appears in this CI screen Field Default setting Port Configuration page 3 52 Unit 1 Status Enabled for all ports LnkTrap On Autonegotiation Enabled for all ports Speed Duplex 100Mbs Half when Autonegotiation is Disabled High Speed Flow Control Unit 1 to 8 depending on Configuration page 3 54 Autonegotiation Flow Control configuration status Enabled Disabled Note The following two fields only appear when a single Phy MDA with a separate redundant Phy port is installed Preferred Phy Active Phy Right Read only field indicating the operational Phy port Right Left or None MultiLink Trunk Configuration page 3 59 Trunk Members Unit Port Zero length string STP Learning Normal Trunk Mode Basic Trunk Status Enabled Trunk Name Trunk 1 to Trunk 6 MultiLink Trunk Utilization page 3 61 Traffic Type Rx and Tx Port Mirroring Configuration page 3 64 Monitoring Mode Disabled Monitor Unit Port Unit Port X Unit Port Y Address A Ad
223. o modify any of the spanning tree parameters see your SNMP documentation 309985 B Rev 00 3 91 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Choose Spanning Tree Configuration or press p from the main menu to open the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen Spanning Tree Configuration Menu N Spanning Tree Port Configuration Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings Return to Main Menu Use arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option i Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu F Figure 3 38 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen Table 3 33 describes the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen options Table 3 33 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu Screen Options Option Description Spanning Tree Port Configuration Displays the Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen see Spanning Tree Port Configuration on page 3 93 Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings Displays the Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen see Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings on page 3 96 Return to Main Menu Exits the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu and displays the main menu 3 92 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Spanning Tree Port Configuration The Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen allows you to configure individual switch ports or all switch ports for participation in the spanning tree Note If spanning tre
224. o select the Switch Configuration option in the main menu press the w key Note that the text characters are not case sensitive To toggle between values in a form a Usethe spacebar to highlight the value b Press Enter To clear a string field a Position the cursor in the string field b Press Ctrl K To return to the previous menu press Ctrl R To return to the main menu at any time press Ctrl C Press Backspace to delete entered text Accelerator Keys You can use accelerator keys to enter repetitive data into the fields of certain screens The accelerator keys can be used only on fields that require entering a list which includes the MAC Address Security Port Lists screen and the MAC Address Security Table screen 3 2 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface For more information about using the accelerator keys see Accelerator Keys for Repetitive Tasks on page 3 33 Screen Fields and Descriptions Figure 3 1 shows a map of the CI screens The remainder of this chapter describes the CI screens and their fields beginning with the main menu Main Menu IP Configuration Setup MAC Address Table MAC Address Security Configuration SNMP Configuration MAC Address Based Security MAC Address Security Port Configuration System Characteristics VLAN Configuration MAC Address Security Port Lists Switch Configuration Port Configuration MAC Address Security Table Console Comm Port Con
225. ocess or the load host has stopped responding 2006 File access error Check that the file name of the software image is correct and that the file protection is properly set for access 2007 Non data packet received from the Check that the file name of the software image is TFTP load host correct 2008 Requested software image is too large Check that the file name of the software image is correct and that you are accessing the appropriate software image for your switch continued 309985 B Rev 00 Troubleshooting Table 4 3 Software Download Error Codes continued Error code Description Corrective action 2009 Received image failed CRC check Verify that the switch software image is valid not corrupted and repeat the software download process 2010 No MAC address found in EEPROM Contact the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center 309985 B Rev 00 Appendix A Technical Specifications This appendix lists the technical specifications for the BayStack 410 24T switch Environmental Parameter Operating Specification Storage Specification Temperature 5 to 40 C 41 to 104 F 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F Humidity 85 maximum relative humidity 95 maximum relative humidity noncondensing noncondensing Altitude 3024 m 10 000 ft 3024 m 10 000 ft Electrical Parameter Specifications Input Voltage 100 to 240 VAC 47 to 63 Hz Input Power Consumption Input Volt Amperes Rating Input
226. odes BootP When Needed BootP Always or to BootP or Last Address 3 10 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface BootP Disabled Allows the switch to be managed only by using the IP address set from the console terminal this is the default mode for your switch When selected this mode operates as follows e The switch does not broadcast BootP requests regardless of whether an IP address is set from the console terminal e The switch can be managed only by using the in band IP address set from the console terminal These actions take effect after the switch is reset or power cycled even if an IP address is not currently in use BootP or Last Address Allows the switch to be managed even if a BootP server is not reachable When selected this mode operates as follows When the IP data is entered from the console terminal the data becomes the in band address of the switch and BootP requests are not broadcast The switch can be managed using this in band IP address e When the in band IP address is not set from the console terminal the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP reply containing an in band IP address If the switch does not receive a BootP reply that contains an in band IP address within 10 minutes the switch uses the last in band IP address it received from a BootP server This IP information is displayed in the Last BootP column If an IP address is not currently in use
227. ole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Nortel Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not sublicense assign or otherwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Nortel Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Nortel Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Nortel Networks and properly installed and operated on Nortel Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Nortel Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Nortel Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided wi
228. omm Port on page 2 10 You can also manage the BayStack 410 24T switch using Bay Networks Optivity network management software or any generic SNMP based management software however certain parameters such as the switch IP address or stack IP address if configured must be supplied for the switch management function to become fully operational see Initial Setup on page page 2 17 Note If you have a properly configured BootP server in your network it will detect the IP address you will not need to configure the IP address For information about SNMP see your network management documentation 309985 B Rev 00 3 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Using the CI Menus and Screens The CI menus and screens provide options that allow you to configure and manage the BayStack 410 24T switch Help prompts at the bottom of each menu and screen explain how to enter data in the highlighted field and how to navigate the menus and screens Some options allow you to toggle among several possible values other options allow you to set or modify a parameter Navigating the CI Menus and Screens Use the following methods to navigate the CI menus and screens To select a menu option a Usethe arrow keys to highlight the option name b Press Enter The option takes effect immediately after you press Enter Alternatively you can press the key corresponding to the underlined letter in the option name For example t
229. on Unit Allows you to select the unit number when stacking is configured to view or configure To view or configure another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers Port Indicates the switch port numbers that correspond to the field values in that row of the screen for example the field values in row 2 apply to switch port 2 The values that you set in the Switch row will affect all switch ports and when the switch is part of a stack the values that you set in the Stack row will affect all ports in the entire stack Trunk The read only data displayed in this column indicates the trunks that correspond to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields of the Trunk Configuration screen see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 53 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 19 Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Status Allows you to disable any of the switch ports You can also use this field to control access to any switch port Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled Link A read only field that indicates the current link state of the corresponding port as follows Up The port is connected and operational Down The port is not connected or is not operational LnkTrap Allows you to control whether link up link down traps are sent to the configured trap Autonegotia
230. on affer you press Enter The Monitoring Mode field Address A gt Address B indicates that all traffic transmitted by address A to address B will be monitored by the StackProbe attached to Monitor port 23 Note When you enter MAC addresses in this screen they are also displayed in the MAC Address Table screen see MAC Address Table on page 3 20 Port Mirroring Configuration Monitoring Mode Address A gt Address B Monitor Unit Port 23 Unit Port X Unit Port Y Address A 00 44 55 44 55 22 Address B 00 33 44 33 22 44 Is your port mirroring configuration complete Yes Currently Active Port Mirroring Configuration Monitoring Mode gt Port X or Port Y gt Monitor Port 23 Port X 25 Port Y 24 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice or Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Vut Figure 1 53 Port Mirroring Address Based Screen Example 309985 B Rev 00 1 85 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Port Mirroring Configuration Rules The following configuration rules apply to any port mirroring configuration A monitor port cannot be configured as a trunk member or IGMP member and cannot be used for normal switch functions When a port is configured and enabled as a monitor port the port is automatically disabled from participating in the spanning tree When the port
231. on that is not compatible with the IEEE 802 3u autonegotiating standard the BayStack 410 24T switch cannot negotiate a compatible mode for correct operation e If the autonegotiation feature is not present or not enabled at the connected station the BayStack 410 24T switch may not be able to determine the correct duplex mode In both situations the BayStack 410 24T switch autosenses the speed of the connected station and by default reverts to half duplex mode If the connected station is operating in full duplex mode it cannot communicate with the switch To correct this mode mismatch problem 1 Use the Port Configuration screen to disable autonegotiation for the suspect port see Port Configuration on page 3 52 2 Manually set the Speed Duplex field to match the speed duplex mode of the connected station see Table 3 19 on page 3 53 You may have to try several settings before you find the correct speed duplex mode of the connected station If the problem persists 1 Disable the autonegotiation feature at the connected station 2 Manually set the speed duplex mode of the connected station to the same speed duplex mode you have manually set for the BayStack 410 24T switch port Port Interface Ensure that the devices are connected using the appropriate crossover or straight through cable see Appendix D Connectors and Pin Assignments 309985 B Rev 00 4 7 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch
232. orks recommends that you always configure the top unit in the stack as the base unit In any stack configuration the following applies e The entire stack powers up as a single logical unit within 30 seconds after the base unit initialization e You can attach an RS 232 communications cable to the Console Comm port of any switch in the stack 309985 B Rev 00 1 33 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch e You can downline upgrade the entire stack from any switch in the stack Youcan access and manage the stack using a TELNET connection or any generic SNMP management tool through any switch port that is part of the stack configuration e When stacking three or more switches use the longer 1 meter cascade max return cable PN 303979 A to complete the link from the last unit in the stack to the base unit Redundant Cascade Stacking Feature BayStack 410 24T Switches allow you to connect up to 8 units into a redundant cascade stack If any single unit fails or if a cable is accidently disconnected other units in the stack remain operational without interruption Figure 1 14 shows an example of how a stack configuration reacts to a failed or powered down unit in the stack configuration 1 As shown in Figure 1 14 unit 3 is not operational This can be the result of a failed unit or simply because the unit was powered down 2 Unit 2 and unit 4 directly upstream and downstream from unit 3 sense the loss of l
233. orrect password and username if applicable to access the CI screens g N BayStack Model 410 24T HW Revx FW Vx xx SW VX X X X Password kckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck KKK Enter Password Ns Figure 3 53 Password Prompt Screen You can specify whether a password is required for the TELNET session or the console terminal using the Console Comm Port Configuration screen see Console Comm Port Configuration on page 3 82 If the console terminal is not password protected the system ignores the Logout option 309985 B Rev 00 3 117 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to isolate and diagnose problems with your BayStack 410 24T switch This chapter covers the following topics e Interpreting the LEDs Diagnosing and correcting the problem Normal power up sequence Port connection problems e Software download error codes The chapter topics lead you through a logical process for troubleshooting the BayStack 410 24T switch For example because LEDs provide visual indications of certain problems refer to Interpreting the LEDs on page 4 2 to understand the various states see Table 4 1 that your switch LEDs can exhibit during normal operation For more help in determining the problem Diagnosing and Correcting the Problem on page 4 4 describes symptoms and corrective actions see Table 4 2 you can perform to resolve specific problems Subsequent sections give step
234. ort Packet Type Limit Last 5 Minutes Last Hour Last 24 Hours 15 Both None 44 0 56 0 0 0 16 Both None 67 0 34 0 0 0 17 Multicast 10 65 0 48 0 45 0 18 Both None 77 0 74 0 60 0 19 Both 10 80 0 89 0 90 0 20 Both None 78 0 83 0 98 0 21 Broadcast one 98 0 88 0 44 0 22 Both None 34 0 93 0 0 0 23 Both None 65 0 82 0 56 0 24 Multicast one 76 0 65 0 50 0 25 Both 5 88 0 67 0 0 0 26 Both None 35 0 45 0 90 0 27 Both None 25 0 48 0 78 0 28 Both None 17 0 77 0 89 0 Switch Both None Stack Both None Press Ctrl P to display choices for ports 1 14 Use space bar to display choices press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu A Figure 3 30 Rate Limiting Configuration Screen 2 of 2 You can use this screen to view the percentage of either packet type or both packet types received on each port When the volume of either packet type is high placing severe strain on the network often referred to as a storm you can set the forwarding rate of those packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total available bandwidth 309985 B Rev 00 3 69 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 26 describes the Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields Table 3 26 Rate Limiting Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Unit Only appears if the switch is pa
235. orwarding state Note that the root bridge s Forward Delay parameter value becomes the actual Forward Delay parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Bridge Forward Delay Default Value 15 seconds Range 4 to 30 seconds Indicates the Hello Interval the amount of time between transmissions of BPDUs specified by management for this bridge This parameter takes effect only when this bridge becomes the root bridge Note that although you can set the Hello Interval for a bridge using bridge management software once the spanning tree computation process is complete all bridges participating in the spanning tree network use the root bridge s Hello Interval parameter value If any bridge becomes the root bridge its Hello Interval parameter value becomes the Actual Hello Interval parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Hello Time Default Value 2 seconds Range 1 to 10 seconds Specifies the maximum age in seconds that a Hello message can attain before it is discarded This parameter specified by management for this bridge takes effect only when the bridge becomes the root bridge Note that if this bridge becomes the root bridge its Maximum Age Time parameter value becomes the Actual Maximum Age Time parameter value for all bridges participating in the spanning tree network See also Maximum Age Time Default Value 20 seconds Range 6 to 40 seconds
236. otal number of packets that were transmitted successfully on this port after a single collision Indicates the total number of packets that were transmitted successfully on this port after more than one collision Indicates the total number of packets lost on this port due to excessive collisions Indicates the total number of frames that were delayed on the first transmission attempt but never incurred a collision Indicates the total number of packet collisions that occurred after a total length of time that exceeded 512 bit times of packet transmission The following field values appear only when the port selected in the Unit Port field is configured with a gigabit MDA Pause Frames Transmitted column Indicates the total number of pause frames transmitted on this port Pause frames cause the transmitting port to temporarily suspend the transmission of packets when the receiving port s frame buffer is full gigabit ports only Received column Indicates the total number of pause frames received on this port Pause frames cause the transmitting port to temporarily suspend the transmission of packets when the receiving port s frame buffer is full gigabit ports only 309985 B Rev 00 3 81 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Console Comm Port Configuration The Console Comm Port Configuration screen Figure 3 35 allows you to configure and modify the console comm port parameters and security features of a sta
237. otocol type of your protocol based VLAN to set this field the VLAN State field value must be Inactive You can choose from any of 15 predefined supported protocols see Predefined Protocol Identifier PID Description on page 3 44 or you can create your own user defined protocol based VLAN see the User defined PID field description for more information Default None Range None Ip Ether2 Ipx 802 3 Ipx 802 2 Ipx Snap Ipx Ether2 ApITk Ether2Snap Declat Ether2 DecOth Ether2 Sna 802 2 Sna Ether2 NetBios 802 2 Xns Ether2 Vines Ether2 Ipv6 Ether2 User Defined Rarp Ether2 continued 3 42 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 13 VLAN Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description User defined PID VLAN State Port Membership Allows you to create your own user defined protocol based VLAN where you specify the Protocol Identifier PID for the VLAN To set this field the VLAN State field must be set to Inactive some restrictions apply see User Defined Protocol Identifier PID Description on page 3 45 Default 0x0000 Range Any 4 bit hexadecimal value for example OXABCD Allows you to activate your newly created VLAN The following associated field values VLAN Type Protocol Id PID and User defined PID must be configured appropriately before this field can be set to Active After you set the VLAN State field value to Active you cannot change th
238. ou to select the number of the port you want to view To view another port type its port number and press Enter or press the spacebar on your keyboard to toggle the port numbers PVID Read only field that indicates the PVID setting for the specified port Port Name Read only field that indicates the port name assigned to the specified port VLANs Column header for the read only fields listing the VLANs associated with the specified port VLAN Name Column header for the read only fields listing the VLAN Names associated with the specified port Traffic Class Configuration The Traffic Class Configuration screen Figure 3 20 allows you to assign a Low or High traffic classification to any of eight 0 to 7 user_priority values assigned to a received frame on specified switch ports Note If you change the Traffic Class Configuration for any switch in a stack configuration the entire stack resets with the current configuration settings see Table 3 1 on page 3 5 for details of the Reset option See IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing on page 1 57 for more information about this screen Choose Traffic Class Configuration or press t from the VLAN Configuration Menu screen to open the Traffic Class Configuration screen 3 50 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface g N Traffic Class Configuration User Priority Traffic Class Priority 0 Low Priority 1 Low Priority 2 Low Priority 3 Low
239. pen the IGMP Configuration screen IGMP Configuration screen Are VLANs Go to VLAN flowchart Create VLANs configured configure port members as required Is the Snooping field set correctly Set the correct value for the Snooping field Is Snooping field set Is the Proxy field set Set the correct value correctly for the Proxy field Key g gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41055A Figure C 7 Configuring IGMP Snooping 1 of 3 C 8 309985 B Rev 00 Quick Steps to Features Is the Robust Value field Set the correct value for set correctly the Robust Value field Is the Query Set the correct value for Timer field set the Query Timer field Is the Set Set the correct value for Router Ports field the IGMP version in the set correctly Set Router Ports field Is the Proxy field set Set the correct value correctly for the Proxy field Key g gt Off page reference O On page reference BS41056A Figure C 8 Configuring IGMP Snooping 2 of 3 309985 B Rev 00 C 9 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Are all IGMP members Configure all IGMP members configured see IGMP Configuration Rules All VLANs on this port are now configured as IGMP router ports Is the port a trunk member All trunk members for that trunk are automatically configured as IG
240. plays the IGMP Configuration Menu see IGMP Configuration Menu on page 3 71 This screen allows you to optimize multicast traffic by setting up IGMP port memberships that filter multicast on a per port basis see IGMP Snooping on page 1 52 for more information about this feature Display Port Statistics Displays the Port Statistics screen see Port Statistics on page 3 78 This screen allows you to view detailed information about any switch port Clear All Port Statistics Allows you to clear all port statistics This option is followed by screen prompts that precede a choice of actions Ifthe switch is operating standalone choose one of the following Yes to clear all port statistics for all switch ports No to abort the option If the switch is participating in a stack configuration choose one of the following Clear all port statistics for a specific unit in the stack Clear all port statistics for the entire stack No to abort the option Return to Main Menu Exits the Switch Configuration Menu screen and displays the main menu MAC Address Table The MAC Address Table screen Figure 3 7 allows you to view MAC addresses that the switch has learned or to search for a specific MAC address The MAC Address Table screen also operates in conjunction with the Port Mirroring Configuration screen When you configure a switch for MAC address based port mirroring you can use the MAC Address Table scre
241. ple To configure the PVID port VLAN identifier for Port 8 1 From the VLAN Configuration screen press Ctrl R to return to the VLAN Configuration Menu 2 From the VLAN Configuration Menu select VLAN Port Configuration or press c The default VLAN Port Configuration screen opens Figure 1 28 The VLAN Port Configuration screen settings shown in Figure 1 28 are default settings 309985 B Rev 00 1 47 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch r Use space bar to display choices VLAN Port Configuration Unit Port Filter Tagged Frames Filter Untagged Frames Filter Unregistered Frames Port Name PVID Port Priority Tagging 1 L No No No 0 Untagged Access press Return or lt l Enter to select choice Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menue Figure 1 28 Default VLAN Port Configuration Screen Example Figure 1 29 shows the VLAN Port Configuration screen after it is configured to support the PVID assignment for port 8 as shown in Figure 1 25 Port Name is optional The PVID VLAN association for VLAN 3 is now PVID 3 1 48 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch VLAN Port Configuration Unit Port Filter Tagged Frames Filter Untagged Frames Filter Unregistered Frames Port Name PY ID Port Priority 1 8 No No No
242. plex JOOBASE TX full duplex 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch e Front panel light emitting diodes LEDs to monitor the following Power status System status Stack status for the following Cascade Up and Cascade Down status Base unit status RPSU status Per port status for the following 10 Mb s link TX Rx activity Management enable disable e Upgradeable device firmware in nonvolatile flash memory using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP e Configuration file download upload support Allows you to store your switch stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server e Remote monitoring RMON with four groups integrated Statistics History Alarms Events e Security MAC address based security Allows you to limit access to the switch based on MAC addresses RADIUS network security Allows you to set up your switch with RADIUS based Remote Authentication Dial In User Services security for authenticating local console and TELNET logins 309985 B Rev 00 1 11 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Virtual Local Area Networks VLANs In a traditional shared media network traffic generated by a station is propagated to all other stations on the local segment Therefore for any given station on the shared Ethernet the local segment is the collision domain because traffic on the segment has the potential to cause an Ethernet collision
243. port based monitoring modes or any one of five address based monitoring modes see Table 3 25 Selecting any one of the six port based modes activates the port X and port Y screen fields where you can choose up to two ports to monitor Selecting any one of the five address based modes activates the Address A and Address B screen fields where you can specify MAC addresses to monitor Default Value Disabled Range See Table 3 25 continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 65 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 24 Port Mirroring Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Monitor Unit Port Unit Port X Unit Port Y Address A Address B Indicates the port number of the specified unit that is designated as the monitor port Default Value Zero length string Range 1 to 8 1 to 28 depending on model type Indicates one of the ports of the specified unit that will be monitored by the designated port monitor when one of the port based monitoring modes is selected This port will be monitored according to the value X in the Monitoring Mode field see Table 3 25 Default Value Zero length string Range 1 to 8 1 to 28 depending on model type Indicates one of the ports of the specified unit that will be monitored by the designated port monitor when one of the port based monitoring modes is selected When installed as a standalone switch the screen does not display the Unit field designat
244. pp due bp Pa pb HO RD 3 109 Excessive Bad EWIIBS aie iiS toe toes be usb ei d dd dic qa dob ep de a 3 110 ons TSN a uu e eb tels SEM rcc bin chaos Eis ERI acci um Eder e Gadaee 3 110 Paan esi ERR S E TT 3 111 ROSE oo nedicstboop ipte E Onde et tie daenana dea Eb ind Eon ee 3 112 Reset to Delault eve uoccecasaect ska pond nonc ania eset tubo nU nantes 3 114 EE S SESSEL RU T T T mM 3 117 309985 B Rev 00 xi Chapter 4 Troubleshooting PES PSTN NE LEDS Rr LENT 4 2 Diagnosing and Correcting the Problem neirinnen 4 4 Normal Fower Up SaqubliGB uon tte a D ee v Ee Db ad EAR REDDE PUER 4 5 Port Connection PEODIBITIB cusa sssepdiui usada adiectae da ai Eat i asd tu EN ett Ea dud 4 6 PUTO MGT AON eor em 4 7 dM III NUN E 4 7 Software Download Error DOUBE 2 debet d ddirob acid E no UII E tn DO a dub b rs TR 4 8 Appendix A Technical Specifications Ei ITI DID ETT A 1 il M A 1 Piste al Dimens iong Lasse epica prp sel e rada hri bd asco d pni dite a Prata A 2 Performance Specifications ssssss aen ror ee A 2 Network Protocol and Standards Compatibility eene nennen A 2 BEI MEET D D A 3 tic xb Area op sopan nei geen tern idant eect iad A 3 erste Eee T HR A 3 EIS COTA METIS siye SONG MEN er A 3 Eleptomagnetic TMINN Ee Pentre Reece tnt aa a Ea ere Tree rer A 4 B wc mE pd T T A 4 Appendix B Media Dependent Adapters TUBABE L HBOSADSESTAX
245. previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Wn Figure 3 31 IGMP Configuration Menu Screen Table 3 27 describes the IGMP Configuration Menu screen options Table 3 27 IGMP Configuration Menu Screen Options Option Description IGMP Configuration Displays the IGMP Configuration screen see IGMP Configuration on page 3 72 This screen allows you to set up IGMP configurations continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 71 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 27 IGMP Configuration Menu Screen Options continued Option Description Display Multicast Group Displays the Multicast Group Membership screen see Multicast Group Membership Membership on page 3 76 This screen allows you to view all IP multicast addresses that are active in the current LAN Return to Switch Exits the IGMP Configuration Menu screen and displays the Switch Configuration Menu Configuration Menu screen IGMP Configuration Figure 3 32 shows an example of the IGMP Configuration screen in a stacked configuration When installed as a standalone switch the screen does not display the Unit field designation In this example switch ports 8 and 14 of unit 1 ports 2 and 6 of unit 2 and port 16 of unit 4 are set to receive all IP multicast related traffic The configured ports are VLAN port members of VLAN 5 and are called Static Router Ports Choose IGMP Configuration or press g from the IGMP Configuration Me
246. ption press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt to select option ig Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main a MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu A MultiLink Trunk Configuration MultiLink Trunk Utilization Return to Switch Configuration Menu Figure 3 24 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu Screen Table 3 21 describes the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen options Table 3 21 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu Screen Options Option Description MultiLink Trunk Configuration MultiLink Trunk Utilization Return to Switch Configuration Menu Displays the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen Figure 3 25 This screen allows you to configure up to six MultiLink trunks within a standalone switch or within a stack configuration You can group up to four switch ports together to form each trunk Displays the MultiLink Trunk Utilization screen Figure 3 26 and Figure 3 27 This screen allows you to monitor the bandwidth utilization of the configured trunks Exits the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen and displays the Switch Configuration Menu screen 3 58 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen The MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen Figure 3 25 allows you to configure up to six trunks in a standalone switch or stack In a stack configuration trunk members can be distributed between any of the units wi
247. ption Description VLAN Allows you to view Multicast group addresses on specified VLANs You can use the space bar to view group addresses for any existing IGMP configurations the maximum number of VLANs that can be displayed is 64 Multicast Group Address Displays all the IP multicast group addresses that are currently active on the Port associated port Displays the port numbers that are associated with the IP multicast group addresses displayed in the IP multicast group address field 309985 B Rev 00 3 77 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Port Statistics The Port Statistics screen Figure 3 34 allows you to view detailed information about any switch port in a stacked or standalone configuration The screen is divided into two sections Received and Transmitted so that you can compare and evaluate throughput or other port parameters All screen data is updated approximately every 2 seconds You can use the Port Statistics screen to clear reset to zero port counters for a specific port Alternatively you can use the Clear All Port Statistics option to clear port counters for all ports see Switch Configuration on page 3 18 Choose Display Port Statistics or press d from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the Port Statistics screen FK Port Statistics wy i Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Unit 1 Port 1 Received Transmitted Packets 0
248. rante sera remplac e par la configuration usine d s que vous appuierez sur Entr e Precauci n Si selecciona el comando Restaurar valores predeterminados todos los valores de configuraci n se sustituir n por las valores predeterminados en f brica al pulsar Intro Attenzione Nel caso in cui si selezioni la reimpostazione dei valori di default tutte le impostazioni configurate verranno sostituite dai default di fabbrica premendo il tasto Invio tubi FERR TEIH Enter v zm FJ OREI EY Toe NED32274 Tuas 3 LES DAMHEBOBELIE a tite ne Or nm m E Allows a user in a TELNET session or a user working at a password protected console terminal to terminate the session see Logout on page 3 117 309985 B Rev 00 3 7 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch IP Configuration Setup The IP Configuration Setup screen Figure 3 3 allows you to set or modify the BayStack 410 24T switch IP configuration parameters Data that you enter in the user configurable fields takes effect as soon as you press Enter Choose IP Configuration Setup or press i from the main menu to open the IP Configuration Setup screen IP Configuration Setup BootP Request Mode BootP Disabled Configurable In Use Last BootP In Band Stack IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Switch IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 In Band Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 J 040 00 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway
249. re ports have the same path cost the STA selects the path with the highest priority lowest numerical value See also Path Cost Default Value 128 Range 0 to 255 Path Cost This read only field is a bridge spanning tree parameter that determines the lowest path cost to the root Default Value 10 or 100 Path Cost 1000 LAN speed in Mb s The higher the LAN speed the lower the path cost See also Priority Range 1 to 65535 State This read only field indicates the current port state within the spanning tree network Each port can transition to various states as determined by the Participation field setting For example when the Participation field is set to Disabled the port does not participate in the STA and transitions to the Forwarding state the default When the Participation field is set to Enabled the port transitions from the Disabled state through the Blocking Listening and Learning states before entering the Forwarding state Default Value Topology dependent Range Disabled Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding 309985 B Rev 00 3 95 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings The Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen Figure 3 41 allows you to view spanning tree parameter values for the BayStack 410 24T switch Choose Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings or press d from the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu screen to open the Spanning Tree Switch Settings scr
250. re provides an in use default value for the In Band Subnet Mask field based on the class of the entered IP address Enter the IP subnet mask address in the In Band Subnet Mask field then press Return Enter the default gateway address in the Default Gateway field then press Return Proceed to Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface for detailed descriptions of the menus and screens you can use to customize your configuration 309985 B Rev 00 2 19 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Stack Setup For the initial setup of a stack configuration you need to enter the stack IP address the subnet mask and the gateway address refer to Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface for more information about configuring your BayStack 410 24T switch To set the stack IP address subnet mask and gateway address for the switch Note Unless otherwise specified the terms switch and unit are used interchangeably in this guide 1 Connect a console terminal to one of the switches in the stack You can connect a console terminal to any unit in the stack or to more than one stack unit see Console Comm Port on page 2 10 2 Power up the stack configuration Observe the console display screen 3 After the Nortel Networks logo screen appears press Ctrl Y a Theconsole screen temporarily displays the standalone Main Menu screen see Figure 2 15 This is the same Main Menu screen
251. reen On The corresponding port is set to operate at 10 Mb s Off The link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Blinking The corresponding port is management disabled 3 F Dx Full duplex port status LEDs green On The corresponding port is in full duplex mode Off The corresponding port is in half duplex mode 4 Activity Port activity LEDs green Blinking Indicates the network activity level for the corresponding port A high level of network activity can cause LEDs to appear to be on continuously 5 10BASE T 100BASE TX RJ 45 8 pin modular port connectors 309985 B Rev 00 100BASE Media Dependent Adapters The RJ 45 ports are configured as media dependent interface crossover MDI X connectors These ports connect over straight cables to the network interface controller NIC card in a node or server similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub If you are connecting to another Ethernet hub or Ethernet switch you need a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the attached device The 400 4TX MDA can operate at either 10 Mb s or 100 Mb s The speed is determined through autonegotiation with its connecting device For installation instructions see Installing an MDA on page B 6 FX MDAs AN Warning Fiber optic equipment can emit laser or infrared light that can injure your eyes Never look into an optical fiber or connector port Always assume t
252. res 3 10 and 3 11 allows you to Enable or Disable the MAC address security for each port Choose MAC Address Security Port Configuration or press p from the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu to display the MAC Address Security Port Configuration screen MAC Address Security Port Configuration Port Trunk Security 1 Disabled 2 Disabled 3 Disabled 4 Disabled 5 Disabled 6 Disabled 7 Disabled 8 Disabled 9 Disabled 10 Disabled 11 Disabled 12 Disabled 1 3 Disabled 14 Disabled Press Ctrl N to display choices for additional ports Use space bar to display choices Unit LI press Return or lt l More Enter to select choice oi Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main diia Figure 3 10 MAC Address Security Port Configuration Screen 1 of 2 3 28 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface di MAC Address Security Port Configuration A Unit 1 Port Trunk Security 15 Disabled 16 Disabled 17 Disabled 18 Disabled 19 Disabled 20 Disabled 21 Disabled 22 Disabled 23 Disabled 24 Disabled Switch Enable Stack Enable Press Ctrl P to display choices for ports 1 14 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice cm Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main ida Figure 3 11 MAC Address Security Port Configuration Screen 2 of 2
253. ring of up to 32 printable characters 309985 B Rev 00 3 13 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 3 SNMP Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Read Write The community string used for in band read write SNMP operations Community String Trap 1 IP Address Community String Authentication Trap AutoTopology Default Value private Range Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters Number one of four trap IP addresses Successive trap IP address fields are numbered 2 3 and 4 Each trap address has an associated community string see Community String Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP address assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point The community string associated with one of the four trap IP addresses see Trap 1 IP Address Default Value Zero length string Range Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters Determines whether a trap will be sent when there is an SNMP authentication failure Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled Allows you to enable or disable the switch participation in autotopology which allows network topology mapping of other switches in your network Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled 1 The Trap IP Address and Community String fields can be set using a MIB table in a Nortel Networks proprietary MIB The status of the row in
254. rmation about the port mirroring feature see Port Mirroring Conversation Steering on page 1 80 Figure 3 28 shows an example of a Port Mirroring Configuration screen in a stack configuration where port 12 in stack unit 3 is designated as the monitoring port for ports 5 and 6 of stack unit 4 When installed as a standalone switch the screen does not display the Unit field designation Choose Port Mirroring Configuration or press i from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the Port Mirroring Configuration screen 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface 2 Port Mirroring Configuration Monitoring Mode Port X or Port Y gt Monitor Unit Port 3 12 Unit Port X 4 5 Unit Port Y 4 6 Address A 00 00 00 00 00 00 Address B 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port mirroring configuration has taken effect Currently Active Port Mirroring Configuration Monitoring Mode gt Port X or Port Y gt Monitor Unit 3 Port 12 Unit X 4 Port X 5 Unit Y 4 Port Y 6 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice es Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu P Figure 3 28 Port Mirroring Configuration Screen Table 3 24 describes the Port Mirroring Configuration screen fields Table 3 24 Port Mirroring Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Monitoring Mode Allows you to select any one of six
255. rroring Configuration sssrinin inniinn iniaa Ee adu ua meia 1 81 Address Based Mirroring Configuration ausa corre eucoscier cte p nente rtr innnan 1 83 Port Mirroring Gonfiguratorn PUB eres pecia aerea cca jc rr donc 1 86 Chapter 2 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Installer FPecuro moi cosip einai areas ee AGS 2 1 ds bust perc AN et err tnnt ere e ern Terr pore Te 2 3 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch on a Flat Surface sssssss 2 3 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch in a Rack sssssss 2 4 309985 B Rev 00 Attaching Devices to the BayStack 410 24T Switch 2 7 Connecting 10BASE T Ports and 10 100 MDA Ports sees 2 8 Connecting Fiber Optie MDA Poris uui csi rtp ad cca occae cu dian xc 2 9 ORISHA FOTE corse oco tte ideae oct poen Raa ia 2 10 Connecting a Terminal to the Console Comm Port ccsscceeesssteeeessteeeeeees 2 11 Bosques Miis AE 2 12 bogupreguriips5 n 2 14 Verifying the Installation Using the LEDS sessirnir 2 14 Verifying the Installation Using the Self Test Screen sssssessssss 2 15 D IPzT me 2 17 UNOS SWEN NUD sos dasa das accedi duritia i arash iad eatiaad Qe dca e deo cl 2 17 irm He upper gio ladon men tledseas nudes ieee emdemialem omnia 2 20 Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface Accessing the GI Menus and SCFBBITS Las cce esser ton ote ra aabb ski dd pae Rete ANE P be t
256. rrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option i Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main P VLAN Configuration Menu DN VLAN Configuration VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Display by Port Traffic Class Dencimusa ime Return to Switch Configuration Menu Figure 3 16 VLAN Configuration Menu Screen Table 3 12 describes the VLAN Configuration Menu screen options Table 3 12 VLAN Configuration Menu Screen Options Option VLAN Configuration VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Display by Port Traffic Class Configuration Return to Switch Configuration Menu Description Displays the VLAN Configuration screen see VLAN Configuration on page 3 40 This screen allows you to set up VLAN workgroups Displays the VLAN Port Configuration screen see VLAN Port Configuration on page 3 46 This screen allows you to set up a specific switch port Displays the VLAN Display by Port screen see VLAN Display by Port on page 3 49 Displays the Traffic Class Configuration screen see Traffic Class Configuration on page 3 50 Exits the VLAN Configuration Menu screen and displays the Switch Configuration Menu screen 309985 B Rev 00 3 39 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch VLAN Configuration The VLAN Configuration screen Figure 3 17 allows you to assign VLAN port memberships to standalone or s
257. rt filtering switch e Ne Figure 1 31 IP Multicast Propagation With IGMP Routing MEN Host Membership Report BS41026A The BayStack 410 24T switch can automatically set up IP Multicast filters so the IP Multicast traffic is only directed to the participating end nodes see Figure 1 32 In Figure 1 32 switches S1 to S4 represent a LAN connected to a IP Multicast router The router periodically sends Host Membership Queries to the LAN and listens for a response from end stations All of the clients connected to switches S1 to S4 are aware of the queries from the router 309985 B Rev 00 1 53 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch One client connected to S2 responds with a host membership report Switch S2 intercepts the report from that port and generates a proxy report to its upstream neighbor S1 Also two clients connected to S4 respond with host membership reports causing S4 to intercept the reports and to generate a consolidated proxy report to its upstream neighbor S1 Designated router BN Host Membership Query Consolidated report BayStack 410 24T Switch BayStack 410 24T Switches BayStack 410 24T
258. rt of a stack configuration It indicates that the ports in this row are associated with the specified unit number configured in the Unit field continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 63 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 23 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen Fields continued Field Description Last 5 Minutes Last 30 Minutes Last Hour This read only field indicates the percentage of packets of the type specified in the Traffic Type field utilized by the port in the last five minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds This read only field indicates the percentage of packets of the type specified in the Traffic Type field utilized by the port in the last thirty minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds This read only field indicates the percentage of packets of the type specified in the Traffic Type field utilized by the port in the last hour This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds Port Mirroring Configuration The Port Mirroring Configuration screen allows you to configure a specific switch port to monitor up to two specified ports or two MAC addresses You can specify port based monitoring or address based monitoring In a stack configuration you can monitor ports that reside on different units within the stack For more info
259. rt when using this feature Default Value Disabled Range Disabled Symmetric Asymmetric Note The following two fields only appear when a single MAC MDA with a separate redundant Phy port is installed Allows you to choose the preferred Phy port the other Phy port reverts to backup Default Value Right Range Right Left Indicates the operational Phy port Default Value None Range None Right Left Choosing a High Speed Flow Control Mode The High Speed Flow Control feature allows you to control traffic and avoid congestion on the gigabit full duplex link If the receive port buffer becomes full the BayStack 410 24T switch issues a flow control signal to the device at the other end of the link to suspend transmission When the receive buffer is no longer full the switch issues a signal to resume the transmission You can choose Symmetric or Asymmetric flow control mode Symmetric Mode This mode allows both the gigabit MDA port and its link partner to send flow control pause frames to each other When a pause frame is received by either the gigabit MDA port or its link partner the port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause release control frame is received Both devices on the link must support this mode when it is selected 3 56 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Asymmetric This mode allows the link partner to send
260. rticipating in a stack configuration The field allows you to select the number of the unit you want to view or configure To view or configure another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar on your keyboard to toggle the unit numbers Port Indicates the switch port numbers that correspond to the field values in that row of the screen for example the field values in row 2 apply to switch port 2 Note that the values applied in the All row bottom row affect all switch ports Packet Type Allows you to select the packet types for rate limiting or viewing Default Value Both Range Both Multicast Broadcast Limit Sets the percentage of port bandwidth allowed for forwarding the packet types Last 5 Minutes Last Hour Last 24 Hours specified in the Packet Type field When the threshold is exceeded any additional packets specified in the Packet Type field are discarded Default Value None Range None 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 This read only field indicates the percentage of packets of the type specified in the Packet Type field received by the port in the last five minutes This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every 15 seconds Note that this field indicates the receiving port s view of network activity regardless of the rate limiting setting This read only field indicates the percentage of packets of the type specified in the Packet Type field recei
261. rving LEDs to Verify Proper Operation 2 14 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Verifying the Installation Using the Self Test Screen If a monitor is connected to the switch see Console Comm Port on page 2 10 you can observe the BayStack 410 24T switch Self Test screen Figure 2 11 shows an example of a standalone switch Self Test screen The results of the self test are displayed briefly 5 or 10 seconds in the Self Test screen which is followed by the Nortel Networks Logo screen Figure 2 12 Note The Self Test screen remains displayed only if the self test detects a fatal error N BayStack 410 24T Self Test CPU RAM test is Pass ASIC addressing test Pass ASIC buffer RAM test Pass ASIC buffer stack init test Pass Port internal loopback test eae Pass Cascade SRAM test Pass Fan test sea Fass Self test complete is A Figure 2 11 BayStack 410 24T Switch Self Test Screen Note The Self Test screen for a switch that is participating in a stack configuration includes an additional test cascade SRAM test 309985 B Rev 00 2 15 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch 2 L Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk KKK KKK KKK KKK kk ck ck kk kk kk kck kk ck KKK KKK KKK KKK Nortel Networks Copyright c 1996 2000 All Rights Reserved BayStack 410 24T Versions HW Revx FW Vx xx SW vx x x x ISVN x c
262. s 192 0 1 0 Allowed Source Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Value 0 0 0 0 no IP mask assigned Range Four octet dotted decimal notation where each octet is represented as a decimal value separated by a decimal point 309985 B Rev 00 3 101 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Software Download The Software Download screen Figure 3 43 allows you to revise the BayStack 410 24T switch software image that is located in nonvolatile flash memory To download the BayStack 410 24T switch software image you need a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server in your network and an IP address for the switch or stack if configured To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address see IP Configuration on page 3 8 You can monitor the software download process by observing the BayStack 410 24T switch LEDs see LED Indications During the Download Process on page 3 104 Caution Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process If the power is interrupted the firmware image can become corrupted Achtung Unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr zum Ger t nicht w hrend die Software heruntergeladen wird Bei Unterbrechung der Stromzufuhr kann das Firmware Image besch digt werden Attention Ne pas couper l alimentation de l appareil pendant le chargement du logiciel En cas d interruption le programme r sident peut tre endommag Precauci n
263. s 2 4 Filtered Packets field 3 80 filtering database identifier FID 1 38 Find an Address field 3 22 flat surface installing on 2 4 Flooded Packets field 3 80 Forward Delay field 3 98 forwarding rate packets per second 1 9 Frame Errors field 3 80 G gateway address setting 2 17 2 20 grounding the switch 2 3 2 5 H Hello Interval 3 97 3 98 Hello Time field 3 97 High Speed Flow Control 3 54 IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing feature 1 18 IEEE 802 1Q Tagging important terms 1 37 IEEE 802 3u standard 1 18 IGMP Snooping configuration rules 1 56 feature 1 18 Image Filename field 3 103 In Use field 3 9 Inactivity Timeout field 3 100 In Band IP Address field 3 9 In Band Subnet Mask field 3 9 309985 B Rev 00 installation chassis in a rack 2 5 flat surface 2 4 grounding 2 3 LED verification 2 14 requirements 2 1 tools 2 1 verifying 2 14 IP address at startup 2 17 automatic configuration 1 20 format of 2 18 2 23 setting 2 17 IP Configuration option 3 5 IP Configuration screen 3 8 IP subnet mask address at startup 2 17 setting 2 17 2 20 L Last BootP field 3 9 Last Reset Type field 3 16 Late Collisions field 3 81 learning rate addresses per second 1 9 LEDs indications during software download process 3 105 status monitors 1 11 verifying installation with 2 14 Link field 3 54 Login Retries field 3 100 Login Timeout field 3 100 Logout option 3 7 3 1
264. s 3 69 configuration 3 68 Rate Limiting Configuration option 3 19 Rate Limiting Configuration screen 3 68 Read Only Community String field 3 13 Read Write Community String field 3 14 remote monitoring RMON 1 11 request mode choosing 3 10 requirements power cords 1 7 Reset Count field 3 16 Reset option 3 6 3 112 Reset to Default Settings option 3 6 3 114 RJ 45 port connector illustration D 1 pin assignments D 2 RMON See remote monitoring 309985 B Rev 00 Root Path Cost field 3 97 Root Port field 3 97 RS 232 console port 2 10 S Security 1 13 MAC address based network security 1 15 RADIUS based network security 1 15 Self Test screen during software download process 3 104 settings default E 1 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP MIB support 1 9 1 21 using to manage the switch 1 21 Single Collisions field 3 81 SNMP Configuration option 3 5 SNMP Configuration screen 3 13 SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol software download process 3 104 Software Download option 3 6 Software Download screen 3 103 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu 3 91 Spanning Tree Configuration option 3 6 Spanning Tree Port Configuration option 3 92 Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen 3 93 Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen 3 96 Speed Duplex field 3 54 Stack MAC address 1 30 Stack up down configurations 1 31 Stacking base unit 1 29 cascade module 1 27 Cascade Mo
265. s physically disconnected and then reconnected to port 13 the Spanning Tree Port Configuration screen for switch S1 changes to show port 6 in the Blocking state Figure 1 49 display S1 Port Configuration screen S1 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Port Trunk participation Priority 1 L Enabled 128 2 1 Enabled 128 Enabled 128 4 1 Enabled 128 5 Enabled 128 6 1 I Enabled 128 7 Enabled 128 8 Enabled 128 9 Enabled 128 10 Enabled 128 ii Enabled 128 12 Enabled 128 Path Cost NETWORKS owo NORTEL NETWORKS S2 Figure 1 49 Example 2 Detecting a Misconfigured Port Press Ctrl N to display choices ces press Return or lt S2 Port Configuration screen 1 78 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Additional Tips About the MultiLink Trunking Feature When you create a MultiLink Trunk the individual trunk members the specific ports that make up the trunk are logically connected and react as a single entity For example if you change spanning tree parameters for any trunk member the spanning tree parameters for all trunk members are changed All configured trunks are indicated in the Spanning
266. s that correspond to the field values in that row of the screen for example the field values in row 2 apply to switch port 2 Note that the values in the Switch row affect all switch ports and when the switch is part of a stack the values in the Stack row affect all ports in the entire stack Trunk The read only data displayed in this column indicates the trunks that correspond to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields of the Trunk Configuration screen see MultiLink Trunk Configuration on page 3 57 continued 3 94 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 34 Spanning Tree Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Participation Allows you to configure any or all of the switch ports for Spanning tree participation When an individual port is a trunk member see Trunk field changing this setting for one of the trunk members changes the setting for all members of that trunk You should consider how this can change your network topology before you change this setting see MultiLink Trunking Configuration Rules on page 1 73 The Fast Learning parameter is the same as Normal Learning except that the state transition timer is shortened to two seconds Default Value Normal Learning Range Normal Learning Fast Learning Disabled Priority This read only field is a bridge spanning tree parameter that prioritizes the port s lowest path cost to the root When one or mo
267. se hors tension en cas d urgence Advertencia La nica forma de desconectar la alimentaci n de este dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentaci n El cable de alimentaci n siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicaci n que permita acceder al cable de forma r pida y segura en caso de emergencia gt Avvertenza Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione l unico sistema per spegnere il dispositivo Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posizione che permetta l accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza gt gt Se BRI FSMVAT CEM COT 0 AOR SQVSe OARCT MAn KERAS dixi I3 3178s I fEREL C T2 E 2 12 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch To connect the AC power cord follow these steps 1 Plug one end of the AC power cord into the AC power receptacle on the switch back panel Figure 2 8 Cascade Module BS41043A Figure 2 8 BayStack 410 24T Switch AC Power Receptacle 2 Plug the other end of the AC power cord into the grounded AC power outlet Figure 2 9 k 612FA Ve Figure 2 9 Grounded AC Power Outlet 3 Proceed to the next section Verifying the Installation 309985 B Rev 00 2 13 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Verifying the Installation When power is applied to the switch power on self tests are run You can verify proper operation of the BayStack 410
268. see will immediately destroy or return to Nortel Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Nortel Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to export directly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government 1 export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California
269. seeeeeene 3 39 VLAN Coniguration Serob s sai ob UU tad or eaea qi dub 3 41 VLAN Port Gonfigirallon SOIeell ccs cce a xe eni eati a la E ned id 3 47 VLAN Display Dy POr SOFE ss cauti retia Ev do ise Eo dd esc pcd 3 49 Traffic Class Configuration OOFSBl cecus caetero cte cra ken ecce 3 51 Port Configuration Sereen El DE Z auis pesci uror ra ni e ea ed ld 3 52 Port Configuration Screen 2 OE 2 ssesecs dest eruit diete tendis bece iea 3 53 High Speed Flow Control Configuration Screen 3 55 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu Screen sssssssss 3 58 MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen seeesseeeess 3 60 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen 1 of 2 esssessssss 3 62 MultiLink Trunk Utilization Screen 2 of 2 sssssssss 3 63 Port Mirroring Configuration Sheen ues eco ae reete trece sierra p ruens 3 65 Rate Limiting Configuration Screen 1 of 2 essssssss 3 68 xvii xviii Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 4 1 Figure B 1 Figure B 2 Figure B 3 Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 F
270. ser Defined PID 0x0000 Yes VLAN State Active Port Membership 1 6 7 12 UUUUUU UUUUUU KEY T Tagged Port Member U Untagged Port Member Not a Member of VLAN Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice ON ir Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main md Figure 1 26 Default VLAN Configuration Screen Example The VLAN Configuration screen settings shown in Figure 1 26 are default settings with all switch ports classified as untagged members of VLAN 1 Figure 1 27 shows the VLAN Configuration screen after it is configured to support the VLAN 3 broadcast domain shown in Figure 1 25 VLAN Name is optional 1 46 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Ports 2 4 6 8 10 and 11 are now untagged members of VLAN 3 as shown in Figure 1 25 on page 1 45 dii VLAN Configuration E Create VLAN 3 VLAN Type Port Based Delete VLAN Protocol Id PID None VLAN Name Mary s VLAN User Defined PID 0x0000 Management VLAN Yes VLAN State Active Port Membership 1 6 7 12 Unit 1 U U U U UU KEY T Tagged Port Member U Untagged Port Member Not a Member of VLAN Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice S Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main GM Figure 1 27 VLAN Configuration Screen Exam
271. splays the SNMP Configuration screen see SNMP Configuration on page 3 13 This screen allows you to set or modify the SNMP read only community and read write community strings enable or disable the authentication trap and the link Up down trap set the IP address of trap receivers and set the trap community strings Displays the System Characteristics screen see System Characteristics on page 3 15 This screen allows you to view switch characteristics including number of resets power status hardware and firmware version and MAC address This screen also contains three user configurable fields sysContact sysName and sysLocation When the switch is part of a stack configuration this screen also displays the base unit identification the number of units configured in the stack and the local unit stack number Displays the Switch Configuration Menu screen see Switch Configuration on page 3 18 This menu provides the following configuration options MAC Address Table MAC Address Based Security VLAN Configuration Port Configuration MultiLink Trunk Configuration Port Mirroring Configuration Rate Limiting Configuration IGMP Configuration Display Port Statistics and Clear All Port Statistics Displays the Console Comm Port Configuration screen see Console Comm Port Configuration on page 3 82 This screen allows you to configure and modify the console Comm port parameters including the console port speed and p
272. ssssssseeee 1 20 DESI NB SoA OWL rasaae aA ESEE cba a du RR OH UA Ed n P DONO 1 21 SNMP ISO SIDE sic cas sastajecies as Mimi peche ded endi Sad Pes cle andes 1 21 Newark GOTH ESEOTT 2i etre eh UR rere tre tere aber UR ati req HR PR eda cd p ardt ae Mia 1 22 Deskisp Such MONCTON iie cen tiii goods ice adr Fave ada C MG Erb Fabia ptit 1 22 Segmen Switch JADDPIGBLUOI crcire tene LLL oup P died caupeaiac OM R rR UE 1 24 High Density Switched Workgroup Application ssseeeeeees 1 25 PallSaie Stack Ape e E 1 26 wird riae vanes ceca taincuiane a a a a aariaa 1 27 BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module 1 cease errem kh Funktionen 1 27 Gascade AONE COMECIOV rs 1 28 LOE EIE SHOR EE E O gk nna A ONEA adn at 1 28 Cascade A IM OCONEE aiiin aa a aa 1 28 Base I A 1 29 Iib aeaeo nanana O T 1 29 ird M Tas rinnce a 1 30 Tempora Base MeL 1 30 Removing a Unit fromthe SIAC suse cna id tiondur kaana niea aD 1 31 Sack Comi a oS annarai a E E 1 31 Stank Lp CODIGOS aisr tert AA 1 32 Stack Down Cohniiquraltl Ci si cassisuasiiecicati an ta kic a aai 1 32 Redundant Cascade Stacking FO ature siisii 1 34 viii 309985 B Rev 00 JEEE 802 FO VLAN WOKGOUPE Aer 1 36 ECEE DOSTA TOGON e E 1 37 VLANs Spanning Multiple Swine 11 eas c d etra kd ER natu a 1 41 VLANs Spanning Multiple 802 1Q Tagged Switches sesssssss 1 41 VLANs Spanning Multiple Untagged Switches seessssssss 1 42 GB SE Ole Lasse neni A
273. st 1 printable character up to a maximum of 16 3 88 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Renumber Stack Units The Renumber Stack Units screen Figure 3 36 allows you to renumber the units configured in the stack When selected this option identifies the unit number of each unit in the stack configuration by lighting the corresponding number of port LEDs on each unit for approximately 10 seconds For example unit 3 will display three LEDs Note This menu option and screen only appear when the switch is participating in a stack configuration Choose Renumber Stack Units or press n from the main menu to open the Renumber Stack Units screen di Renumber Stack Units E Current Unit Number MAC Address New Unit Number 1 00 60 fd 77 a6 0c p 32 2 00 60 fd 77 a5 0 2 3 00 60 fd 77 a4 4c 3 4 00 60 fd 77 ab 84 4 Renumbering stack units will cause an automatic Reset to Current Settings to occur across the entire stack The current configuration will be adapted to the new numbering scheme Check the stack configuration after the reset to confirm the desired configuration is set Are you sure you want to renumber switches with the new settings No Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice ee Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Figure 3 36 Renumber Stack Units Screen 309985 B Rev
274. st domain You can assign different ports and therefore the devices attached to these ports to different broadcast domains This feature allows network flexibility because you can reassign VLANs to accommodate network moves additions and changes eliminating the need to change physical cabling For more information about VLANs see IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Workgroups on page 1 36 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Security Your BayStack 410 24T switch security feature can provide two levels of security for your local area network LAN e RADIUS based security Limits administrative access to the switch through user authentication e MAC address based security Limits access to the switch based on allowed source MAC addresses Figure 1 5 shows a typical campus configuration using the BayStack 410 24T switch security features This example assumes that the switch the teachers offices and classrooms and the library are physically secured The student dormitory may or may not be physically secure RADIUS server T gl To Network Center RADIUS based security 2
275. stack configuration through a TELNET session If you set this field to Required you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the Cl of any stack unit Thereafter you will need to specify the correct password at the console terminal prompt when accessing the stack See Console Read Only Stack Password and Console Read Write Stack Password for more information Default Value None Range None Local Password RADIUS Authentication When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password for TELNET for Console or for Both this field allows read only password access to the Cl of a standalone switch Users can access the Cl using the correct password see default but cannot change parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to Default option Default Value user Range An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password for TELNET for Console or for Both this field allows read write password access to the Cl of a standalone switch Users can log in to the Cl using the correct password see default and can change any parameter except the stack passwords You can change the default passwords for read only access and read write access to a private password Default Value secure Range Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters Caution If you change the system supplied default passwords be sure to write the new passwords down and keep them in
276. t 2 and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as unit 8 The physical order of the switches is from bottom to top unit 1 to unit 8 2 1 Last unit 2 Base unit 3 Cascade cable PN 303978 A 4 Cascade max return cable PN 303979 A BS41011A Figure 1 12 Stack Up Configuration Example Stack Down Configurations In Figure 1 13 data flows from the base unit unit 1 to the next switch which is assigned as unit 2 and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as unit 8 The physical order of the switches is from top to bottom unit 1 to unit 8 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch Un F 5 o 1 Base unit 2 Last unit 3 Cascade cable PN 303978 A 4 Cascade max return cable PN 303979 A BS41012A Figure 1 13 Stack Down Configuration Example Certain network management station NMS applications assume a stack down configuration for the graphical user interface GUI that represents the stack see Figure 1 13 on page 1 33 For this reason Nortel Netw
277. tacked unit ports You can also create port based VLANs and protocol based VLANs e Port based VLANs allow you to explicitly configure switch ports as VLAN port members e Protocol based VLANs allow you to configure your switch ports as members of a broadcast domain based on the protocol information within a packet Protocol based VLANs can localize broadcast traffic and assure that only the protocol based VLAN ports are flooded with the specified protocol type packets When you configure ports as VLAN port members they become part of a set of ports that form a broadcast domain for a specific VLAN You can assign switch ports whether standalone or stacked unit ports as VLAN port members of one or more VLANs You can assign VLAN port members attributes that allow the individual ports to operate in accordance with the IEEE 802 1Q tagging rules You can define each of the VLAN port members as tagged or untagged see IEEE 802 1Q Tagging on page 1 37 for a description of important terms used with 802 1Q VLANs You can also use this screen to create and to delete specific VLANs to assign VLAN names and to assign any VLAN as the management VLAN Choose VLAN Configuration or press v from the VLAN Configuration Menu screen to open the VLAN Configuration screen 3 40 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface a VLAN Configuration b Create VLAN 1 VLAN Type Port Based Delete VLAN Protocol Id PI
278. tal number of packets lost discarded when the capacity of the port transmit buffer was exceeded continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 79 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 30 Port Statistics Screen Fields continued Field Description Packets 64 bytes Received column Indicates the total number of 64 byte packets received on this 65 127 bytes 128 255 bytes 256 511 bytes 512 1023 bytes 1024 1518 bytes FCS Errors Undersized Packets Oversized Packets Filtered Packets Flooded Packets Frame Errors port Transmitted column Indicates the total number of 64 byte packets transmitted successfully on this port Received column Indicates the total number of 65 byte to 127 byte packets received on this port Transmitted column Indicates the total number of 65 byte to 127 byte packets transmitted successfully on this port Received column Indicates the total number of 128 byte to 255 byte packets received on this port Transmitted column Indicates the total number of 128 byte to 255 byte packets transmitted successfully on this port Received column Indicates the total number of 256 byte to 511 byte packets received on this port Transmitted column Indicates the total number of 256 byte to 511 byte packets transmitted successfully on this port Received column Indicates the total number of 512 byte to 1023 byte packets received on this port Transmitted column Indicates the
279. te dial in management of the switch The port is a male DB 9 connector implemented as a data communication equipment DCE connection To use the Console Comm port you need the following equipment A VT100 or ANSI compatible terminal or a PC with a serial port and the ability to emulate a VT100 terminal Configure the terminal settings as follows 9600 baud No parity 8 bits stop bit Flow control set to Xon Xoff Window Terminal Emulator option set to NO Terminal Preferences Function Arrow and Control keys active Buffer size set to 24 A UL listed straight through RS 232 cable with a female DB 9 connector for the console port on the switch The other end of the cable must have a connector appropriate to the serial port on your computer or terminal Most terminals or computers use a male DB 25 connector Any cable connected to the console port must be shielded to comply with emissions regulations and requirements See DB 9 RS 232 D Console Comm Port Connector on page D 1 for a description of the pin assignments 2 10 309985 B Rev 00 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch Connecting a Terminal to the Console Comm Port To connect a terminal to the Console Comm port 1 Set the terminal protocol as described in Console Comm Port on page 2 10 2 Connect the terminal or a computer in terminal emulation mode to the console port using the RS 232 cable 3 Connect t
280. th string Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters The physical location of the switch Default Value Zero length string Range Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters 1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station NMS only 56 characters are displayed on the console terminal 309985 B Rev 00 3 17 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Switch Configuration The Switch Con figuration Menu screen Figure 3 6 allows you to set or modify your switch configuration Note The High Speed Flow Control Configuration option only appears when an optional gigabit MDA is installed in one or more stack units Choose Switch Configuration or press w from the main menu to open the Switch Configuration Menu screen ultil MAC Address Table AC Address Based Security VLAN Configuration Port Configuration High Speed Flow Control Configuration Port Mirroring Configuration ES Switch Configuration Menu Link Trunk Configuration Rate Clear Limiting Configuration IGMP Configuration Display Port Statistics Return to Main Menu Use arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option s Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main ND All Port Statistics Figure 3 6 Switch Configuration Menu Screen Table 3 5 describes the Switch Configur
281. the Monitor Port for ports 24 and 25 in switch S1 Note The Unit value in the Unit Port field cannot be configured when the switch is operating standalone The Monitoring Mode field gt Port X or Port Y gt indicates that all traffic received by port X or all traffic transmitted by port Y is currently being monitored by the StackProbe attached to Monitor port 23 The screen data displayed at the bottom of the screen shows the currently active port mirroring configuration 309985 B Rev 00 Introduction to the BayStack 410 24T Switch FK Port Mirroring Configuration UN Monitoring Mode L gt Port X or Port Y gt Monitor Unit Port 23 Unit Port X 25 Unit Port Y E 24 Address A 00 00 00 00 00 00 Address B 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port mirroring configuration has taken effect Currently Active Port Mirroring Configuration Monitoring Mode gt Port X or Port Y gt Monitor Port 23 Port X 25 Port Y 24 Use space bar to display choices press Return or Enter to select choice d Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main dt Figure 1 51 Port Mirroring Port Based Screen Example Address Based Mirroring Configuration Figure 1 52 shows an example of an address based mirroring configuration where port 23 the designated monitor port for switch S1 is monitoring traffic occurring between address A and address B 309985 B Rev 00 1 83
282. the first octet of any Multicast address will always be an odd number 309985 B Rev 00 3 37 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch VLAN Configuration Menu The VLAN Configuration Menu screen Figure 3 16 allows you to select the appropriate screen to configure up to 64 VLANs VLAN 1 is port based by default You can configure as many as 63 protocol based VLANS with up to 15 different protocols The number of different protocols you can configure depends on the number of hexidecimal values PID values associated with the protocol type some protocol types use more than one PID value see Table 3 14 on page 3 44 Note The BayStack 410 24T switch ports do not have the ability to assign incoming untagged frames to a protocol based VLAN see Gigabit Ports and BayStack 410 24T Switch Ports Restriction on page 3 46 When you create VLANs you can assign various ports and therefore the devices attached to these ports to different broadcast domains Creating VLANS increases network flexibility by allowing you to reassign devices to accommodate network moves additions and changes eliminating the need to change physical cabling See IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Workgroups on page 1 36 for detailed information about configuring VLANs Choose VLAN Configuration or press v from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the VLAN Configuration Menu 3 38 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Use a
283. these actions take effect immediately If an IP address is currently in use these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled 309985 B Rev 00 3 11 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch BootP When Needed Allows the switch to request an IP address if one has not already been set from the console terminal When selected this mode operates as follows When the IP data is entered from the console terminal the data becomes the in band address of the switch and BootP requests are not broadcast The switch can be managed using this in band IP address e When the in band IP address is not set from the console terminal the switch broadcasts BootP requests until it receives a BootP reply containing an IP address If the switch does not receive a BootP reply that contains an IP address the switch cannot be managed in band If an IP address is not currently in use these actions take effect immediately If an IP address is currently in use these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled BootP Always Allows the switch to be managed only when configured with the IP address obtained from the BootP server When selected this mode operates as follows e The switch continues to broadcast BootP requests regardless of whether an in band IP address is set from the console terminal e If the switch receives a BootP reply that contains an in band IP address the switch uses this ne
284. thin the same stack configuration Any mix of up to eight BayStack 410 24T switches and BayStack 450 switches can be stacked to provide a total of 224 ports when all MDA slots are configured with the maximum port availability Figure 3 25 shows six trunks in a stack configuration e Trunk 1 has four trunk members in unit 3 e Trunks 2 3 4 and 5 each have two trunk members in individual units e Trunk 6 has four trunk members distributed into four separate units of the stack When the trunks are enabled the trunk members take on default settings necessary for correct operation of the MultiLink Trunking feature These default settings can affect the correct operation of your configured network If you disable a trunk you may need to reconfigure the specific trunk members switch ports to return to the previous switch configuration See MultiLink Trunks on page 1 64 for more information Choose Trunk Configuration or press t from the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu screen to open the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen 309985 B Rev 00 3 59 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch J MultiLink Trunk Configuration E Trunk Trunk Members Unit Port STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Status 1 3 6 3 7 3 9 3 17 Normal Basic Enabled 2 4 25 4 26 JE X Normal Basic Enabled 3 6 13 6 14 IE 4 Normal Basic Enabled 4 5 19 5 20 JL Normal Basic
285. tiLink Trunks MultiLink Trunking Configuration Rules The MultiLink Trunking feature is deterministic that is it operates according to specific configuration rules When creating trunks consider the following rules that determine how the MultiLink Trunk reacts in any network topology e Any port that participates in MultiLink Trunking must be an active port set to Enabled via the Port Configuration screen or through network management 309985 B Rev 00 1 73 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch e All trunk members must have the same VLAN configuration before the Trunk Configuration screen s Trunk Status field can be set to Enabled see VLAN Configuration on page 3 40 e When an active port is configured in a trunk the port becomes a trunk member as soon as the Trunk Status field is set to Enabled After the Trunk Status field is set to Enabled the spanning tree parameters for the port will change to reflect the new trunk settings e If spanning tree participation of any trunk member is changed enabled or disabled the spanning tree participation of all members of that trunk is changed similarly see Spanning Tree Considerations for MultiLink Trunks on page 1 76 e When a trunk is enabled the trunk spanning tree participation setting takes precedence over that of any trunk member When a trunk is active the trunk STP setting can be changed from either the Trunk Configuration screen or the Spanning Tree Conf
286. tion Speed Duplex sink from the switch Default Value On Range On Off When enabled sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided by the connected station up to 100 Mb s in full duplex mode when a 10 100 MDA is installed This field is disabled for all fiber optic ports Default Value Enabled Range Enabled Disabled Allows you to manually configure any port to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb s in half or full duplex mode When a 10 100 MDA is installed you can manually configure the MDA ports to support 10 Mb s or 100 Mb s in half or full duplex mode Default Value 10Mbs Half when Autonegotiation is Disabled Range 10Mbs Half 10Mbs Full 100Mbs Half 100Mbs Full 1 Fiber optic ports can only be set to 100Mbs Half or 100Mbs Full High Speed Flow Control Configuration The High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen Figure 3 23 allows you to set the port parameters for any gigabit MDA that may be configured in a stack configuration Note The BayStack 410 24T switch does not support gigabit MDAs however this screen will appear if the BayStack 410 24T switch is part of a stack configuration and only if a gigabit MDA is installed in any stack unit 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Choose High Speed Flow Control Configuration or press h from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen E High Speed Flow Control
287. tklasse A In Wohnbereichen k nnen bei Betrieb dieses Ger tes Rundfunkst rungen auftreten in welchen Fallen der Benutzer f r entsprechende Gegenmafinahmen verantwortlich ist Attention Ceci est un produit de Classe A Dans un environnement domestique ce produit risque de cr er des interf rences radio lectriques il appartiendra alors l utilisateur de prendre les mesures sp cifiques appropri es ii 309985 B Rev 00 EC Declaration of Conformity This product conforms or these products conform to the provisions of Council Directive 89 336 EEC and 73 23 EEC The Declaration of Conformity is available on the Nortel Networks World Wide Web site at http libra2 corpwest baynetworks com cgi bin ndCGI exe Doc View Japan Nippon Requirements Only Voluntary Control Council for Interference VCCI Statement coda HHUA EAMES VCCI Am FROST SR APRRHSRERTT CORRES TREAT ALE HES FRLTLCLMAV ST OMSL RASHES ZLABKANACLEMHOLET Voluntary Control Council for Interference VCCI Statement This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this equipment is used in a domestic environment radio disturbance may arise When such trouble occurs the user may be required to take corrective actions Taiwan Requirements Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection BSMI Statement ERRE GE PRNARES ERODE AM TENER ATE CRA AESH ERAN REM BED B RE
288. to Administrative e Read only access Set the Service Type field value to NAS Prompt For detailed instructions about setting up your RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation For instructions on using the console interface CI to set up the Radius based security feature see Console Comm Port Configuration on page 3 82 MAC Address Based Security The MAC address based security feature allows you to set up network access control based on source MAC addresses of authorized stations You can e Create a list of up to 448 MAC addresses and specify which addresses are authorized to connect to your switch or stack configuration The 448 MAC addresses can be configured within a single standalone switch or they can be distributed in any order among the units in a single stack configuration e Specify which of your switch ports each MAC address is allowed to access The options for allowed port access include NONE ALL and single or multiple ports that are specified in a list for example 1 1 4 1 6 2 9 see Port List Syntax on page 3 33 e Specify optional actions to be exercised by your switch if the software detects a security violation The response can be to send a trap turn on destination address DA filtering disable the specific port or any combination of these three options 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch For instructions on using the console interface CI
289. to set up network access control see MAC Address Based Security on page 3 22 The MAC address based security feature is based on Nortel Networks BaySecure LAN Access for Ethernet a real time security system that safeguards Ethernet networks from unauthorized surveillance and intrusion To learn more about the Nortel Networks BaySecure LAN Access for Ethernet refer to the Bay Networks Guide to Implementing BaySecure LAN Access for Ethernet Part number 345 1106A IEEE 802 1p The BayStack 410 24T switch can prioritize the order in which packets are forwarded on a per port basis For more information about the IEEE 802 1p prioritizing feature see IEEE 802 1p Prioritizing on page 1 57 IGMP Snooping Feature For conserving bandwidth and controlling IP Multicast the IGMP snooping feature can provide the same benefit as IP Multicast routers but in the local area For more information about the IGMP snooping feature see IGMP Snooping on page 1 52 Configuration and Switch Management The BayStack 410 24T switch is shipped directly from the factory ready to operate in any IOBASE T network Optional MDAs are available for connecting to 100BASE T networks You can manage the switch using the Nortel Networks Optivity network management software Nortel Networks Device Manager Software or any generic SNMP based network management software however you must assign an IP address to the switch or stack depending on the
290. tor Keys for Repetitive Tasks You can use certain keystrokes as accelerator keys to help speed up repetitive tasks For example suppose you want to modify the Port List field in the MAC Address Security Port List screen Figure 3 13 on page 3 32 You can modify the port list in any of the following ways e Add a new port to an existing port number list e Remove a port from an existing port number list e Copy an existing field into an adjacent field 309985 B Rev 00 3 33 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Adding a New Port to an Existing Port Number List In the example shown in Figure 3 13 on page 3 32 S3 shows the Port List field values as 1 3 2 7 3 1 4 If you want to add another port for example port 2 9 to the existing port number list you could highlight the field and then type another port list including the new port number 1 3 2 7 2 9 3 1 4 Enter This works but is quite time consuming Instead you can highlight the field and then enter 2 9 Enter The existing field keeps the previous list and adds the new port number 2 9 between ports 2 7 and 3 14 If you had chosen to add port 2 8 to the existing port number list the field accepts the new port 2 8 but shows the new port number list field as 1 3 2 7 8 3 1 4 Removing a Port from an Existing Port Number List To remove a port from the port number list use the minus sign character instead of the plus sign character as descr
291. tors and indicate this condition by lighting their Cas Up and Cas Dwn LEDs see Cas Up and Cas Dwn description in this table If the temporary base unit fails the next unit directly downstream from this unit becomes the new temporary base unit This process can continue until there are only two units left in the stack configuration continued 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 4 1 BayStack 410 24T Switch LED Descriptions continued Label Type Color State Meaning This automatic process is a temporary safeguard only If the stack configuration loses power the temporary base unit will not power up as the base unit when power is restored For this reason you should always assign the temporary base unit as the base unit set the Unit Select switch to Base until the failed unit is repaired or replaced Link 10 Mb s port Green On The corresponding port is set to operate at 10 Mb s and speed indicator the link is good Green Blinking The corresponding port has been disabled by software Off The link connection is bad or there is no connection to this port Activity Port activity Green Blinking Indicates network activity for the corresponding port A high level of network activity can cause the LEDs to appear to be on continuously Diagnosing and Correcting the Problem Before you perform the problem solving steps in this section cycle the power to the BayStack 410 24T sw
292. total number of 512 byte to 1023 byte packets transmitted successfully on this port Received column Indicates the total number of 1024 byte to 1518 byte packets received on this port Transmitted column Indicates the total number of 1024 byte to 1518 byte packets transmitted successfully on this port Indicates the total number of valid size packets that were received with proper framing but discarded because of cyclic redundancy check CRO errors Indicates the total number of packets received on this port with fewer than 64 bytes and with proper CRC and framing also known as short frames or runts Indicates the total number of packets received on this port with more than 1518 bytes and with proper CRC and framing also known as oversized frames Indicates the number of packets filtered not forwarded by this port Indicates the total number of packets flooded forwarded through this port because the destination address was not in the address database Indicates the total number of valid size packets that were received but discarded because of CRC errors and improper framing continued 3 80 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Table 3 30 Port Statistics Screen Fields continued Field Description Collisions Single Collisions Multiple Collisions Excessive Collisions Deferred Packets Late Collisions Indicates the total number of collisions detected on this port Indicates the t
293. ts screen fields Table 3 10 MAC Address Security Port Lists Screen Fields Field Description Entry Indicates the port list number S1 to S32 that corresponds to the values you set in the Port List field Port List Allows you to create a port list that you can use as an Allowed Source in the MAC Address Security Table screen see Port List Syntax on page 3 33 3 32 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface Port List Syntax When you enter a port list in a stack configuration you must specify either a unit port number list NONE or ALL In a stack configuration ALL indicates all of the stack ports in a standalone switch ALL indicates all of the switch ports Note NONE and ALL must be entered in uppercase characters as shown in the screen prompt A unit port number list is composed of one or more list items each of which can be a single number or a range of numbers where the number represents one or more ports If a list item is preceded by a number and then a slash the number represents a stack unit For example 1 1 7 2 1 7 2 9 3 1 4 4 12 is a valid unit port number list see entry S1 in Figure 3 13 on page 3 32 It represents the following port order e Unit 1 ports 1 to 7 e Unit 2 ports 1 to 7 and port 9 e Unit 3 ports 1 to 4 e Unit 4 port 12 See Accelerator Keys for Repetitive Tasks following this section for more information about creating port lists Accelera
294. tup e Instructions for the initial stack setup Refer to Chapter 3 Using the Console Interface to further configure your BayStack 410 24T switch Installation Requirements Before installing the BayStack 410 24T switch verify that the package contains the following items in addition to this guide see Figure 2 1 Note Be sure that the supplied AC power cord matches the requirements for your region see AC Power Receptacle on page 1 7 Install the BayStack 410 24T switch in a ventilated area that is dust free and away from heat vents warm air exhaust from other equipment and direct sunlight Avoid proximity to large electric motors or other electromagnetic equipment When choosing a location observe the environmental guidelines listed in Appendix A Technical Specifications You will need a Phillips screwdriver for the installation 309985 B Rev 00 2 1 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Installation hardware D Mounting brackets and screws Rubber nar L Owner registration card l L Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch AC power cord L Release notes BS41039A Figure 2 1 Package Contents Note Your shipping box may be configured differently than shown in the above example the contents will be the same The number of boxes and their contents depends on the options you ordered Open any accessories box and verify that the contents agree with your b
295. ture sometimes referred to as conversation steering allows a user to designate a single switch port as a traffic monitor for up to two specified ports or two media access control MAC addresses You can specify Port Based monitoring where all traffic on specified ports is monitored or Address Based monitoring where traffic between specified MAC addresses is monitored You can attach a probe device such as a Nortel Networks StackProbe or equivalent to the designated monitor port For more information about the port mirroring feature see Port Mirroring Conversation Steering on page 1 80 309985 B Rev 00 1 19 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch BootP Automatic IP Configuration MAC Address The BayStack 410 24T switch has a unique 48 bit hardware address or MAC address that is printed on a label on the back panel You use this MAC address when you configure the network BootP server to recognize the BayStack 410 24T switch BootP requests A properly configured BootP server enables the switch to automatically learn its assigned IP address subnet mask IP address of the default router default gateway and software image file name When the switch is participating in a stack configuration a Stack MAC address is automatically assigned during the stack initialization The base unit s MAC address with a software offset is used for the Stack MAC address For example if the base unit s MAC address is 00 00 8
296. ty 0 Tagging Untagged Access Use space bar to display choices m Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main mar press lt Return gt or lt Enter gt to select choice Figure 3 18 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Table 3 16 describes the VLAN Port Configuration screen fields Table 3 16 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Unit Allows you to select the unit number when stacking is configured to view or configure To view another unit type its unit number and press Enter or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers To find the unit number for a specific switch in the stack configuration use the Identify Unit Numbers option see Table 3 1 on page 3 5 Port Allows you to select the number of the port you want to view or Filter Tagged Frames configure To view another port type its port number and press Enter or press the spacebar to toggle the port numbers Allows you to set this port to filter discard all received tagged packets No No Yes Default Range continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 47 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch Table 3 16 VLAN Port Configuration Screen Fields continued Field Description Filter Untagged Frames Filter Unregistered Frames Port Name PVID Port Priority Tagging Sets this port to filter discard all received untagged frames Restriction If this port is a gigabit port or
297. ty Table on page 3 35 When you specify a port or ports to be cleared using this field the specific port or ports will be cleared for each of the entries listed in the MAC Address Security Table If you totally clear the allowed Source field leaving a blank field for any entry the associated MAC address for that entry is also cleared This field also clears the associated Port List field in the MAC Address Security Port Lists screen Figure 3 13 Default NONE Range NONE ALL A port number list for example 1 1 4 3 6 4 ALL etc All source MAC addresses of any packets received on the specified port or ports are added to the MAC Security Table when the Current Learning Mode field see next field description is set to Enabled You cannot include any of the ports that are enabled for MAC address security see MAC Address Security Port Configuration on page 3 28 Default NONE Range NONE ALL A port number list for example 1 1 4 3 6 4 ALL etc Indicates the current learning mode for the switch ports When this field is set to Enabled all source MAC addresses of any packets received on the specified port or ports are added to the MAC Security Table maximum of 448 MAC address entries allowed Default Disabled Range Disabled Enabled 309985 B Rev 00 3 27 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch MAC Address Security Port Configuration The MAC Address Security Port Configuration screen Figu
298. uando il dispositivo viene installato in stack su un ripiano o su un tavolo il peso dei cavi connessi alle porte aumenta in proporzione all altezza del ripiano o del tavolo aE E a E EB COTqUAT UOROASUVZITALAE RY A RI NM HAIDA Hh 7 TILOeEE HL 309985 B Rev 00 2 3 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch The BayStack 410 24T switch can be mounted onto any appropriate flat level surface that can safely support the weight of the switch and its attached cables as long as there is adequate space around the unit for ventilation and access to cable connectors To install the switch on a tabletop shelf or any other flat surface 1 Setthe switch on the flat surface and check for proper ventilation Allow at least 2 inches 5 1 cm on each side for proper ventilation and 5 inches 12 7 cm at the back for power cord clearance 2 Attach rubber feet to each marked location on the bottom of the chassis The rubber feet are optional but recommended to keep the unit from slipping 3 Attach all devices to the ports See Attaching Devices to the BayStack 410 24T Switch on page 2 7 Installing the BayStack 410 24T Switch in a Rack Caution When mounting this device in a rack do not stack units directly on top of one another in the rack Each unit must be secured to the rack with appropriate mounting brackets Mounting brackets are not designed to support multiple units Achtung Wenn Sie
299. ved by the port in the last hour This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every five minutes Note that this field indicates the receiving port s view of network activity regardless of the rate limiting setting This read only field indicates the percentage of packets of the type specified in the Packet Type field received by the port in the last 24 hours This field provides a running average of network activity and is updated every hour Note that this field indicates the receiving port s view of network activity regardless of the rate limiting setting 1 Rate limiting is disabled if this field is set to None This allows you to select and view the percentage of specific packet types present in the network without inadvertently limiting the forwarding rate 3 70 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface IGMP Configuration Menu The IGMP Configuration Menu screen Figure 3 31 allows you to select the appropriate screen to optimize IP multicast packets in a bridged Ethernet environment see IGMP Snooping on page 1 52 Choose IGMP Configuration or press g from the Switch Configuration Menu screen to open the IGMP Configuration Menu screen IGMP Configuration Menu N IGMP Configuration Display Multicast Group Membership Return to Switch Configuration Menu Use arrow keys to highlight option press Return or Enter to select option Kk Ctrl R to return to
300. w in band IP address e If the switch does not receive a BootP reply the switch cannot be managed using the in band IP address set from the console terminal If an IP address is not currently in use these actions take effect immediately If an IP address is currently in use these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled 3 12 309985 B Rev 00 Using the Console Interface SNMP Configuration The SNMP Configuration screen Figure 3 4 allows you to set or modify the SNMP configuration parameters Choose SNMP Configuration or press m from the main menu to open the SNMP Configuration screen i SNMP Configuration UN Read Only Community String public Read Write Community String private Trap 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Community String Trap 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Community String Trap 3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Community String Trap 4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Community String Authentication Trap Enabled AutoTopology Enabled Enter text press Return or Enter when complete Press Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main Menu Me of Figure 3 4 SNMP Configuration Screen Table 3 3 describes the SNMP Configuration screen fields Table 3 3 SNMP Configuration Screen Fields Field Description Read Only The community string used for in band read only SNMP operations Community String Default Value public Range Any ASCII st
301. ware Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license a to use the Software either on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Nortel Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Nortel Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in wh
302. ws the MultiLink Trunk Configuration screen for switch S2 a Es l Ctrl R to return to previous menu Press Ctrl C to return to Main e MultiLink Trunk Configuration Trunk Trunk Members Unit Port STP Learning Trunk Mode Trunk Status T 25 11 26 IL Normal Basic Enabled 2 Zi YE Z3 1T Z7 Ji Normal Basic Enabled 3 IE THE 2A Jt Normal Basic Disabled 4 PE Z Jt Jt Normal Basic Disabled 5 p lt Jt Normal Basic Disabled 6 JL JL TE Normal Basic Disabled Trunk Trunk Name 1 SZITZ to Si 2 S2 T3 to S1 3 Trunk 3 4 Trunk 44 5 Trunk 5 6 Trunk 6 Enter text press Return or Enter when complete Figure 1 43 Switch S2 is configured as follows MultiLink Trunk Configuration Screen for Switch S2 e Trunk read only indicates the trunks 1 to 6 that corresponds to the switch ports specified in the Trunk Members fields Trunk Members Unit Port indicates the ports that can be configured in each row to create the corresponding trunk Ports 25 and 26 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 1 Ports 1 and 3 are assigned as trunk members of trunk 2 309985 B Rev 00 Using the BayStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch STP Learning indicates the spanning tree participation setting for each of the trunks Trunk 1 and 2 are enabled for Normal STP Learning Trunk Mode read only
303. y access and read write access to a private password Default Value secure Range Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters Caution If you change the system supplied default passwords be sure to write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place If you forget the new passwords you cannot access the console interface In that case contact Nortel Networks for help Achtung Wenn Sie die f r das System standardm ig eingestellten PaBw rter andern notieren Sie sich die neuen PaBw rter und bewahren Sie sie an einem sicheren Ort auf Falls Sie die neuen PaBworter vergessen k nnen Sie nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an Nortel Networks um Unterst tzung zu erhalten Attention Si vous changez les mots de passe par d faut du syst me assurez vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans un endroit s r Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe vous ne pourrez plus acc der votre interface Le cas ch ant veuillez contacter Nortel Networks Precauci n Si modifica las contrase as predeterminadas asignadas por el sistema aseg rese de anotar las nuevas contrasefias y gu rdelas en un lugar seguro Si olvida las nuevas contrase as no podr acceder al interfaz de la consola En ese caso p ngase en contacto con Nortel Networks para obtener ayuda al respecto continued 309985 B Rev 00 3 87 Usin
304. yStack 410 24T 10BASE T Switch RPSU Connector The RPSU connector allows you to connect a backup power supply unit to the switch Nortel Networks provides an optional high power redundant power supply unit HRPSU for this purpose The HRPSU is a hot swappable power supply unit that provides uninterrupted operation to up to four BayStack 410 24T switches in the event that any of the switch power supplies fail Nortel Networks provides the HRPSU power rack Order No AA0002001 with four slots for power supply modules Order No AA0005003 Each HRPSU can support up to four BayStack 410 24T switches Installation instructions are provided with the HRPSU Contact your Nortel Networks sales representative for more information about the HRPSU Cascade Module Slot The Cascade Module slot allows you to attach an optional BayStack 400 ST1 Cascade Module to the switch see Stack Operation on page 1 27 You can connect up to eight BayStack 410 24T switches into a redundant stack configuration BayStack 410 24T switches use a fail safe cascade stacking architecture which in the unlikely event of a switch failure maintains the integrity of the remaining stack all signals are looped back at the point of failure Because each unit in the stack has a full copy of the stack configuration operation of the stack continues without affecting application connectivity Any mix of up to eight BayStack 410 24T switches and BayStack 450 switches

Nortel Networks 24T User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents